XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF

Xpediter/CICS
COBOL User Guide
Release 17.02
ii Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Please direct questions about Xpediter/CICS

or comments on this document to:
Xpediter/CICS Customer Support
http://go.compuware.com/
This document and the product referenced in it are subject to the following legends:
Copyright 1984 - 2016 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved. Unpublished rights reserved under
the Copyright Laws of the United States.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS-Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to

restrictions as set forth in Compuware Corporation license agreement and as provided in DFARS
227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995),
FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable. Compuware Corporation.
This product contains confidential information and trade secrets of Compuware Corporation. Use,
disclosure, or reproduction is prohibited without the prior express written permission of Compuware
Corporation. Access is limited to authorized users. Use of this product is subject to the terms and
conditions of the users License Agreement with Compuware Corporation.
Xpediter, Xpediter/CICS, Xpediter/Xchange, Xpediter/Code Coverage, Abend-AID for CICS, FrontLine, and
Compuware are trademarks or registered trademarks of Compuware Corporation.
CICSPlex, CICS Transaction Server, DB2, DFSMS, IBM, MVS, MVS/ESA, OS/390, VTAM, IBM MQ for z/OS,
and z/OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Adobe Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Doc. OCT2016
September 30, 2016
iii
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Customer Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Compuware FrontLine Customer Support Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Contacting Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Corporate Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Information for Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Chapter 1. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Product Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
XPED and XPRT Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
XPSP Transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Product Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Source-Level Testing and Debugging Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
CICS Storage Protection Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
CICS Region Maintenance Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
File Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Customizing Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Help Facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Product Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Common Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Common Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Common Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
PF Key Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Update Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Chapter 2. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Preparing a Program for Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The Compuware Language Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Using the NEWCOPY Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Accessing Xpediter/CICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Basic Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Fast-Path Access to the Source Listing screen (2.L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Direct Access to Selected Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Navigating Through Xpediter/CICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a Debugging Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Chapter 3. Testing a COBOL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Testing without Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Viewing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Setting Program Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Executing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Resuming Execution at Another Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
iv Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Stepping and Reviewing Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Intercept Summary (1.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Using Enhanced Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setting an Enhanced Trap on Initial COMMAREA (ICA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setting an Enhanced Trap Using Containers (CONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Setting an Enhanced Trap on MQ Message Descriptor (MQMD) . . . . . . 3-22
Setting an Enhanced Trap on MQ Message Data (MQD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Using Enhanced Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Setting an Enhanced Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Combining Enhanced Breakpoints and Enhanced Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Optimization Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Chapter 4. Debugging Applications Without Source Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

When to Use Sourceless Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Preparing for Sourceless Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using PSEUDOSOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sourceless Debugging without Breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Modifying Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sourceless Debugging without Breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Modifying Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Chapter 5. Debugging Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Setting Breakpoints in a Calling Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Executing a Program Containing Multiple CSECTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Returning to the Calling Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Stepping Through Subroutines and User Condition Handlers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Dynamically Called Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Automatic Selection of CSECTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Language Environment User Condition Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Using the CSECT Selections Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using Profiles to Select CSECTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Chapter 6. Analyzing Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Setting Up the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Executing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Analyzing the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Chapter 7. Monitoring Tasks Started from Remote Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Setting Remote Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Viewing a Remote Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Deferring Remote Trap Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Releasing Trapped Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Viewing Traps for Asynchronous Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Chapter 8. Providing Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Setting Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Allowing Storage Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Chapter 9. Interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Turning on Abend-AID for CICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Accessing Abend-AID for CICS through Xpediter/CICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Issuing an Abend-AID for CICS Snap Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Viewing the Abend-AID for CICS Report Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Viewing the Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Chapter 10. Using Automatic Trap Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Trapping an Abend with ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
v
Chapter 11. Setting Up a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Changing Profile Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Changing PF Key Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Changing Output Translate Table Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Loading a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Saving Profile Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Chapter 12. Accessing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Browsing Records in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Changing File Service Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Chapter 13. Accessing DL/1 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Selecting PSBs and PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Selecting Segments from the PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Retrieving a DL/1 Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Chapter 14. Using Xpediter/CICS with DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Using the DB2 Easy Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Setting DB2 Session Default Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Accessing a List of DB2 Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Editing a Row. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Building an SQL Easy Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Editing a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
DB2 Long Identifier Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Debugging DB2 Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Setting Breakpoints in SQL Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Setting Keeps on DB2-Specific Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12
Interpreting DSNC Abends and SQL Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
DSNC Abends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
SQL Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12
Accessing DB2 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Chapter 15. Using Xpediter/CICS with MQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Using the MQ File Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Accessing a List of MQ Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Browsing Messages on an MQ Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Adding Messages on an MQ Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Debugging MQ Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Enhanced Traps for MQ Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Setting Breakpoints at MQ Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Setting Keeps on MQ-Specific Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Interpreting MQ Completion and Reason Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Chapter 16. Accessing CICS Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Accessing CICS Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Displaying CICS DSECTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Chaining through CICS Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Method 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Method 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Method 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Displaying CICS Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Displaying Program and Transaction Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Reviewing the Select Address List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-7
Chapter 17. Using Global Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Setting Region-Wide Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-1
vi Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Sample Storage Protection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Setting Automatic Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Activating Test Region Storage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Allowing Storage Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Defining System Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Defining Storage Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Monitoring Storage Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Interactive Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Unattended Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Setting Storage Protection during PLT Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Chapter 18. Editing CICS Tables and Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Editing a CICS Table Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Editing from the Memory Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Editing from the DSECTs Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Chapter 19. Using 3270 Web Bridge Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Running Xpediter/CICS Using the 3270 Web Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
vii
Introduction Intro
This guide provides step-by-step instructions on how to use Xpediter/CICS to solve

common debugging problems. To become acquainted with Xpediter/CICS, you should
first review Chapter 1, Product Overview and Chapter 2, Getting Started.
The chapters listed below contain exercises using common examples. The first examples
show how to access and exit the product and how to debug a simple transaction.
Subsequent chapters provide exercises on how to set breakpoints in a program, how to
step through the program, and how to change storage. The later chapters provide
exercises on advanced features.
The exercises cover only a portion of the many Xpediter/CICS screens and functions. For
more information on these topics, see the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
This guide contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1, Product Overview: Introduces Xpediters facilities and discusses the need
for an interactive debugging tool. The overview also includes features that are new to this
release of the product.
Chapter 2, Getting Started: Shows how to prepare your application for debugging,
accessing, and exiting Xpediter/CICS.
Chapter 3, Testing a COBOL Program: Shows how to test an application transaction

with and without breakpoints, and how to inspect program data.
Chapter 4, Debugging Applications Without Source Code: Provides tips on

performing sourceless debugging.
Chapter 5, Debugging Subroutines: Provides tips on setting breakpoints in the calling

and called programs and selecting and excluding CSECTs.
Chapter 6, Analyzing Program Execution: Describes how to set up program analysis.
Chapter 7, Monitoring Tasks Started from Remote Terminals: Describes how to set
and intercept remote traps.
Chapter 8, Providing Storage Protection: Shows how to handle storage violations

and set region-wide storage protection.
Chapter 9, Interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS: Discusses the interface with
Compuwares Abend-AID for CICS fault diagnosis product.
Chapter 10, Using Automatic Trap Activation: Explain how ATA traps abends
without the user having an Xpediter session active.
Chapter 11, Setting Up a Profile: Describes how to set up a customized environment

that modifies program default values.
Chapter 12, Accessing Files: Shows you how to browse records, change file service
requests, and work with data and storage queues.
Chapter 13, Accessing DL/1 Databases: Shows how to list PCBs and edit a DL/I
segment.
Chapter 14, Using Xpediter/CICS with DB2: Tips on row and column editing of DB2
tables and views.
viii Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Chapter 15, Using Xpediter/CICS with MQ: Describes the MQ File Utility and how to
debug MQ programs.
Chapter 16, Accessing CICS Storage: Describes how to access and update CICS
storage.
Chapter 17, Using Global Storage Protection: Shows how to set protection, define
system labels, and control storage exceptions.
Chapter 18, Editing CICS Tables and Control Blocks: Describes how to display CICS
table entries and DSECTs.
Chapter 19, Using 3270 Web Bridge Support: Demonstrates how to run Xpediter
using the 3270 Web Bridge function.
Glossary: Describes Xpediter/CICS features, and defines key terms.
Intended Audience
Xpediter/CICS is structured in three levels to accommodate several types of users. The
audience for this manual may differ, depending on the experience of the user and the
transactions for which the user is authorized. The following three transactions are used
to describe Xpediters three levels:
XPED Intended for application programmers who want a source level focus.
XPRT Intended for application programmers who want a break/abend focus.
XPSP Intended for experienced system programmers who are authorized to update
CICS tables and control areas.
System Environment
See the Xpediter/CICS Release Notes for the most current system environment information.
Related Publications
The documents in the following list are no longer provided in the installation package.
For details, see Online Documentation below.
Xpediter/CICS Release Notes: Overview of release features, supported operating

environments, customer support, and any new Xpediter information.
Xpediter/CICS Installation and Configuration Guide: Gives step-by-step instructions for the
system programmer to configure, customize, and maintain Xpediter/CICS. Refer to it
when installing Xpediter/CICS according to the Compuware Installer Mainframe Products
SMP/E Installation Guide.
Xpediter/CICS Quick Configuration Guide: Provides the basic required steps to configure,
start, access, and test Xpediter at your site.
Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual: Provides specific reference information about
Xpediters features, utilities, menus, and command parameters.
Xpediter/CICS User Guide for Assembler, COBOL, PL/I, or C: Introduction to Xpediters
levels, screens, and functions.
Xpediter/CICS Quick Reference: Handy reference for screen IDs and command syntax.
Xpediter/CICS Messages and Codes: Lists error and warning messages that might be
encountered during installation or use of Xpediter.
Introduction ix
For information regarding Compuware Shared Services, refer to the Enterprise Common
Components Installation and Customization Guide.
Online Documentation
The Xpediter/CICS product installation package does not include the product
documentation. Access the Xpediter/CICS documentation from the Compuware
FrontLine customer support website at http://go.compuware.com in the following
electronic formats:
Release Notes in HTML format

Product manuals in PDF format
Adobe PDF index file (PDX file)
Product manuals in HTML format.
The product documentation is available for viewing or downloading:
View PDF files with the free Adobe Reader, available at http://www.adobe.com.
View HTML files with any standard web browser.
Customer Support
Compuware provides a variety of support resources to make it easy for you to find the
information you need.
Compuware FrontLine Customer Support Website

You can access online information for Compuware products via our FrontLine customer
support website at http://go.compuware.com.
Compuware FrontLine provides access to critical information about your Compuware

products. You can review frequently asked questions, read or download documentation,
access product fixes, or e-mail your questions or comments. The first time you access
Compuware FrontLine, you are required to register and obtain a password. Registration is
free.
Contacting Customer Support

Phone
USA and Canada: 1-800-538-7822 or 1-313-227-5444.
All other countries: Contact your local Compuware office. Contact information is
available at http://go.compuware.com.
Web
You can report issues via the Quick Link Create & View Support Cases on the
Compuware FrontLine home page.
Note: Please report all high-priority issues by telephone.
Mail
Compuware Customer Support
Compuware Corporation
One Campus Martius
Detroit, MI 48226-5099
x Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Corporate Website
To access Compuwares site on the Web, go to http://www.compuware.com.
The Compuware site provides a variety of product and support information.
Information for Customer Support

If problems arise, please check your manual for assistance. If problems persist, please
obtain the following information before calling Compuware for assistance. This
information will help determine the exact cause of the problem as quickly as possible.
1. Identify the release number of Compuware product(s) in use.

2. Identify the operating system.
3. Identify the release of CICS Transaction Server that is being used.
4. If an abend occurs, note the displacement and the module in which it occurs. If
possible, obtain a copy of the system dump.
5. Note the sequence of steps (including all commands issued) that resulted in the
problem. Also note any variable data types and programming languages involved.
6. To receive product fixes electronically, be ready to provide your email address.
1-1
Chapter 1.
Product Overview Chap 1
Xpediter/CICS gives the CICS programmer complete control over the execution of
application code, trapping of abends, and access to data files and CICS storage, including
tables and control blocks in DSECT format. An easy-to-use architecture allows you to
interactively debug application programs quickly and accurately.
Xpediter/CICS lets you control the execution of your program and monitor its status at
any time. You can set breakpoints to suspend execution (with or without conditions),
change the program logic flow, intercept abends or storage violations, and many other
functions, all without leaving the test session or recompiling.
Xpediter/CICS allows you to interact directly with the program as it executes, allowing
you to perform the following functions:
View and interact with program source code, online.

Display and update records in files, transient data, temporary storage, DB2 tables,
and DL/I databases. Xpediter also gives you the option of logging any changes.
List, browse, and update MQ message queues.
List a tasks active channels and containers, and browse container data.
Stop execution of a program at any point and examine working storage.
Resume execution at any point in the program.
Execute statements one at a time while examining program logic.
Modify any unprotected program data, CICS table, or CICS area.
Monitor remote transactions.
Ensure region integrity through storage protection.
Note: XPLINK programs are excluded from Xpediter/CICS storage protection.
Using Xpediter/CICS, you can observe a program as it executes, stop execution, look at
intermediate results, correct problems as they arise, and proceed with the test. When
Xpediter/CICS traps an abend, it displays a wealth of information that aids in
understanding and correcting that abend. You can even resolve multiple problems during
a single test session. Xpediters Script Facility allows you to record selected primary and
line commands entered during a debugging session, save them in a dataset, and then
replay them later.
Xpediter/CICS provides alternatives for problem resolution. When the product identifies
a problem, you can select particular statements at which to suspend execution, then
analyze both working storage and a program trace. If a program stops at an abend, you
can correct the problem or bypass the abend. To bypass an abend, just instruct Xpediter
to resume execution at a statement number or offset past the point of the abend.
Three restricted modes of operation Diagnosis Mode, Utilities Mode, and

Diagnosis/Utilities Mode allow a site to tailor its Xpediter implementation to suit the
processing integrity and throughput requirements of its various CICS regions. This means
you can deploy Xpediter/CICS as a crucial, safe, and effective tool in your production
CICS regions. Utilizing Xpediter in a restricted operating mode, especially along with
Abend-AID for CICS, lets you quickly diagnose and resolve critical production failures
without wasting time and effort recreating the problem in a test region.
1-2 Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Note: All descriptions in this manual, unless otherwise noted, pertain to Xpediters
standard, non-restricted operating mode.
Product Architecture
Xpediter/CICS is designed to provide different levels of functionality.
The ISPF-like nature of Xpediter and its source-based approach make it immediately
familiar. Yet it is powerful enough to meet your most complex debugging requirements.
Xpediter/CICS provides an efficient, non-intrusive architecture that can protect the CICS
region from storage violations. It also offers complete CICS-specific debugging
capabilities for both application and system programmers in the CICS environment.
Xpediter/CICS supports applications written in Assembler, COBOL, C, or PL/I, plus a

variety of other programming languages on an Assembler instruction-level basis.
Xpediters unique multi-access design lets users access the product through their choice
of three separate and securable debugging transactions:
XPED access causes Xpediter to display the Source Listing screen (2.L) when an
abend occurs or a breakpoint is encountered.
XPRT retains the feel of earlier releases by displaying the Break/Abend screen (2.1) at
an abend or breakpoint.
XPSP access provides all the power of the XPED and XPRT transactions, plus
additional system maintenance capabilities for the CICS specialist responsible for
supporting the CICS region.
XPED is the standard transaction used by application programmers. All the commands
and functions available with XPED can also be accessed through the XPRT transaction.
With either transaction, Xpediter/CICS provides:
Display-only access to CICS storage areas

Update capability for application transaction storage areas
Access to FCT or CEDA-defined files, transient data, temporary storage, IMS
databases, DB2 tables, and MQ message queues.
The only real difference between the two transactions is that when a breakpoint is
reached or an abend occurs, by default XPED displays the Source Listing screen (2.L),
while XPRT displays the Break/Abend screen (2.1).
The XPSP transaction is designed for those system programmers authorized to update
unprotected CICS tables and control areas. It permits unrestricted storage area updates
and provides hung task analysis, along with other special region maintenance and
debugging functions. XPSP allows you to establish and control system-wide storage
protection.
Xpediter can also be configured to operate in any of three restricted modes of operation:
Diagnosis Mode
Utilities Mode
Diagnosis/Utilities Mode.
These modes allow a site to tailor its Xpediter implementation to suit the processing
integrity and throughput requirements of its various CICS regions. In Diagnosis Mode,
the user is prevented from modifying data or changing the sequence of program
execution. In Utilities Mode, only the Xpediter file utility, storage display facility, and
source listing utility are accessible. Storage, databases, and files can be viewed and
modified, but trap, trace, and monitor functions are unavailable. Diagnosis/Utilities
Mode combines the restrictions of the other two modes. You can access Xpediters file
utility and source listing utility and view storage on the Memory Display (2.2 and 9.2),
Task Storage Display (2.S), and DSECTs (2.D and 9.D) screens. A mode indicator message
Product Overview 1-3
is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of all Xpediter screens when the product is
operating in one of the restricted modes. For more information see Chapter 5, Restricted
Operating Modes in the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
XPED and XPRT Transactions

The XPED transaction accesses all of Xpediter/CICSs functions for source-level testing
and debugging of your application program. The XPRT transaction is intended for CICS
application programmers who prefer the break/abend approach to testing and debugging
that was used in earlier releases of Xpediter/CICS. Both transactions provide the same
enhanced debugging features and allow you to browse CICS storage areas. XPED and
XPRT also let you specify storage protection options, abend traps, and trace options. You
can customize your debugging session through profile options that you can store and use
again. If an abend occurs, Xpediter/CICS automatically displays by default either the
Source Listing screen (2.L) for XPED users, or the Break/Abend screen (2.1) for XPRT
users.
The Xpediter/CICS Primary Menu, shown in Figure 1-1, lists the screen number and
name of each product facility menu available via the XPED and XPRT transactions. The
option shown for Code Coverage, a sophisticated and powerful tool used with
Xpediter/CICS to verify the thoroughness of testing, is only displayed if the separate
Xpediter/Code Coverage product has been installed for the current CICS region. The
option shown for Xchange/CICS is only displayed if Xpediter/Xchange is active in the
CICS region. The option shown for CICSPlex facilities is only displayed if the CICSPLX
global parameter is set to YES.
There are four main ways you can navigate through Xpediter/CICS:
Type one of the screen numbers from a displayed menu in the COMMAND field and
press Enter.
Move the cursor next to the desired screen number on a menu, type S, and press
Enter.
Transfer directly to any product screen by typing an equal sign (=) followed by the
complete screen number for instance =5.2.2 then pressing Enter.
Use PF keys to transfer to commonly used screens. The PF keys and defaults for the
corresponding screens are as follows:
PF6 LOCATE * (2.L or 2.20)

PF13 Primary Menu
PF14 Memory Display screen (2.2)
PF16 Working Storage screen (2.3)
PF17 Program Trace screen (2.4)
PF21 File Utility Menu (5).
Figure 1-1. Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS 17.02.00 - PRIMARY MENU ----------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

0 SESSION PROFILE - Set default session attributes
1 SESSION CONTROL - Analyze summary of session events
2 DEBUGGING FACILITIES - Interactively debug application programs
5 FILE UTILITY - Access datasets, temp stg, trans data, DLI, DB2
7 ABEND-AID FOR CICS - Interface to Abend-AID for CICS

C CODE COVERAGE - Interface to Xpediter/Code Coverage
G XCHANGE/CICS - Interface to Xpediter/Xchange CICS Facilities
P CICSPLEX FACILITIES - Access CICSPlex Control Facilities
X EXIT - Exit Xpediter

To set breakpoints in your program or keep specific data fields,
enter your program name and use either the SOURCE command or PF key.

For Online Technical Support refer to: http://frontline.compuware.com

NOTICE: Press PF2/PF14 to display the Copyright/Trade Secret Notice
While the Primary Menu is displayed, pressing PF2 or PF14 will display the copyright and
trade secret notices as shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2. Copyright/Trade Secret Notice Screen
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - HELP FACILITY --------------------C123

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
MODULE: ******** HIT PF1 AGAIN FOR HELP ON USING TUTORIALS ********
Help Module: DBUHLEGL

Commands: END (Prev screen) CANCEL (Exit help) UP DOWN Line 1 of 19

Copyright 1984 - 2016 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U. S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS |
| Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to |
| restrictions as set forth in Compuware Corporation license agreement |
| and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), |
| DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii)(OCT 1988), Far 12.212(a) (1995), FAR |
| 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable. |
| Compuware Corporation |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND TRADE SECRETS OF COMPUWARE
CORPORATION. USE, DISCLOSURE, OR REPRODUCTION IS PROHIBITED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF COMPUWARE CORPORATION. ACCESS IS LIMITED TO
AUTHORIZED USERS. USE OF THIS PRODUCT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
XPSP Transaction
The XPSP transaction gives the CICS system programmer all the functionality of the
XPED and XPRT transactions, and adds special CICS region-related utilities. When you
access Xpediter/CICS with XPSP, the Primary Menu displayed is similar to the
XPED/XPRT Primary Menu, but with one additional option:
9 SYSTEM FACILITIES - Access global region analysis facilities
When you select option 9, System Facilities, you have access to the extended XPSP
functions, which include:
A CICS storage and table editor

Power to activate storage protection anywhere in the CICS region

Ability to analyze hung (system suspended) CICS transactions and chain through
CICS storage areas
Ability to open and close source listing datasets.
The System Facilities Menu (Figure 1-3) shows the additional functions available to the
XPSP user.
Figure 1-3. System Facilities Menu (9) for XPSP Users
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - SYSTEM FACILITIES MENU (9) -------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

1 VIEW SINGLE TASK - View a selected task
2 MEMORY - Display/modify memory
3 TASK LIST - List all Tasks in the CICS region
4 MONITOR FACILITIES - Display/modify monitoring rules
5 CSECT EXCLUSIONS - Display/modify CSECT exclusions
6 TRAP SUMMARY - Display/modify global ABEND traps
7 STORAGE EXCEPTIONS - Display/modify global storage protection exceptions
8 STORAGE PROTECTION - Display/modify global storage protection entries
9 SYSTEM LABELS - Create system labels for storage areas
D DSECTS - Display formatted DSECTs
L SLS DATASETS - Process SLS datasets
P RESOURCE SUMMARY - Display/remove global breakpoints/keeps
Product Facilities
Compuware product developers know that, without Xpediter, debugging an application
can be among the most time-consuming and exasperating tasks you perform. Yet an
error-free application is an absolute necessity. The Xpediter/CICS facilities listed below
help you locate, identify, and eliminate application errors.
Source-Level Testing and Debugging Facilities

Include an interactive, source code display for PL/I, COBOL, C, and Assembler
programs
Allow dynamic interaction with program source listings
Step through (execute) program statements and instructions in timed slow motion or
one at a time (single-stepping)
Stop execution before or after specified statements or instructions
Skip or redirect execution around specified statements or instructions
Detect, isolate, and prevent transaction abends and storage violations
Allow interactive changes to program variables
Note: In its character display of memory, Xpediter/CICS uses a decimal point to stand
for any unprintable character. For that reason, a decimal point you type into that
character display will not be recognized unless it overtypes a printable character
not another decimal point. When hex is displayed, x'4B' can be entered to
denote a decimal point.
Bypass or modify faulty logic flow

Provide a statement-level trace
Count executions of repetitive statements or paragraphs
Record, save, and play back scripts of primary and line commands.
Interface dynamically with Compuwares fault diagnostic product Abend-AID for

CICS.
View CICS resources online.
CICS Storage Protection Facilities

Region-wide protection capability
Protection filters by terminal, transaction, and program
Protection exceptions plus interactive and unattended protection options
Over 90 detailed diagnostics from Xpediter/CICS
Full range of Abend-AID for CICS diagnostics.
CICS Region Maintenance Facilities

CICS storage and table editor
Formatted DSECTs
Region-wide trap and trace
Hung transaction analysis
Storage chains.
File Utility
Browse, edit, and map records (for COBOL and PL/I only) from CICS files
Log changes to supported resources
Support for BDAM and VSAM files, temporary storage, transient data, DB2 and IMS
databases, and MQ queues.
Customizing Facilities
Multitransaction architecture with specific facilities for different types of users
Three restricted modes of operation
User session profiles
Hexadecimal calculator
Screen footings.
Xpediter/CICS can be used in both the test and production environments for a variety of
tasks, including:
Storage Protection Protection can be set up to monitor new transactions or

programs in the production region, and intercept storage violations before they
occur.
Note: XPLINK programs are excluded from Xpediter/CICS storage protection.
Bad Record Correction The File Utility can be used in either environment to
correct bad records.
System Maintenance Authorized users can view and modify CICS storage without
bringing down the region.
Hung Task Analysis System programmers can look at an end users task to
determine problems.
Remote Trapping Application support personnel are able to set traps to gain
control and diagnose end-user sessions.
Help Facility
Xpediter/CICS contains an extensive set of Help screens to assist you in learning the
product. The Xpediter/CICS Help facility uses hypertext links to allow easy navigation
through topics. Links to related topics are displayed with distinctive color and intensity.
Simply tab to the hypertext link and press Enter to display the linked topic.
Help screens are available from any product screen by pressing PF1. The screens provide
detailed information about the commands and functions available in each of the
Xpediter/CICS areas. Use the Help screens when you need information about a particular
screen or command. For example, to obtain a description of the SHOW command, type
SHOW on the COMMAND line and press PF1, or enter the primary command HELP
SHOW. A description of the format and use of the SHOW command will be displayed.
While in the Help facility, use the following keys to move through the screens:
PF3 Return to the previous Help topic

PF7 Scroll backward
PF8 Scroll forward
Many common 3270 terminal emulation software packages running on PCs can be
configured to allow selection of hypertext links by double-clicking with the left mouse
button. You can also double-click on the highlighted commands (CANCEL, END, UP, and
DOWN) at the top of the Help screens to return to previous topics, scroll, or exit the Help
facility.
Users of IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 4 or above should perform the

following steps to enable mouse navigation of the Xpediter/CICS Help facility:
1. On the Assist menu, click Hotspots Setup.

2. Click the Point-and-Select (Enter at cursor position) check box and then click OK.
The Help PF key can also be used to supply you with additional error information. Error
messages are usually enclosed in asterisks (*). When an error message is displayed with
plus signs (+), you can receive more specific information about that message by pressing
PF1. For example, pressing PF1 for the error message NO SOURCE AVAILABLE will
provide exact information on why source for that particular program cannot be located.
HELP NEWS provides online information about the new features in the latest release,
including new commands, screens, and parameters. HELP NOSOURCE provides
information to help you discover why source listings are not displayed for a particular
program. Several possible causes are listed with suggested solutions.
Product Conventions
This section discusses the following Xpediter/CICS product conventions:
Common screen fields

Command entry
PF key settings
Update password security.
Common Screen Fields

Each screen is identified on the top line by a title or a screen ID. You can navigate from
one Xpediter/CICS screen to another using menus, screen IDs (fast path), or commands.
Figure 1-4 shows the fields that are common across Xpediter/CICS screens. Each field is
described below.
Figure 1-4. Common Screen Fields
MODE:DIAG----------- XPEDITER/CICS - LIST BREAKPOINTS (1.1) -------OPT(2)--C123

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 CSECT: CWDEMCB2 COMPILED: 12 MAY 2015 - 11.17.38
Mode Indicator Message If Xpediter is operating in one of its restricted modes, a

message is displayed in the upper left corner of all screens.
Screen Title and ID Each screen title and ID is unique. Specify the screen ID in the
COMMAND field to display that screen. For example, =1.1 displays the List
Breakpoints screen. A portion of the title is overlaid with the current date and time if
the SET SUPPORT ON command has been issued.
Optimization Indicator As shown in Table 1-1, OPT is displayed for any program
compiled with some level of optimization or inlining. For optimized COBOL 5.1 and
above programs, OPT(n) is displayed, where n is the level of optimization. For
optimized C programs, either OPT or OPT(n) is displayed, depending on the level of
optimization.
Table 1-1. Optimization Indicator Display

Language Compile
OPT Indicator OPT(n) Indicator
Compiler Option
OPTIMIZE Yes for COBOL 4.2 Yes for COBOL 5.1
COBOL
or OPT and below and above
OPTIMIZE
C Yes Yes
or OPT
C INLINE Yes No
OPTIMIZE
PL/I Yes No
or OPT
PL/I INLINE Yes No
System ID The SYSIDNT value for the current CICS region is conveniently
displayed in the upper-right corner of every screen.
COMMAND Field Type primary commands and screen IDs in the COMMAND
field. Some PF keys also depend on the parameters that you enter in this field.
Multiple primary commands, separated by the current command delimiter, can be
entered at the same time. A semi-colon (;) is the default delimiter.
Note: The default command delimiter can be changed with the CMDDLM global
parameter. (See the Xpediter/CICS Installation and Configuration Guide chapter
entitled Global Parameters Table for more information.) The CMDDLM
value is the default delimiter only for users with no delimiter stored in their
user profile, such as new users or existing users invoking a new release of
Xpediter for the first time. Once a command delimiter has been set for a
given user, it can be changed using the DELIM field on the Set Profile
Defaults screen (0.1). See the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual for details.
Note: The HELP primary command cannot be entered together with other
commands, and multiple primary commands cannot be entered from
Xpediters Help facility.
SCROLL Field Sets the scroll value for screens that permit scrolling.
MODULE Field Displays the current load module name regardless of what CSECT
within the load module is being debugged.
CSECT Field Identifies the CSECT on the Xpediter screen. To change to another
CSECT, simply type the new name. Current breakpoints and keeps are retained until
they are deleted or the session is ended.
Notes:
The CSECT field accommodates mixed-case CSECT names up to 16 characters
and abbreviated CSECT names when the name is greater than 16 characters.
This field is protected on the Script Dataset Allocation screen (0.6), the Data Area
screens (2.3), and the Break/Abend screen (2.1).
Xpediter/CICS may issue diagnostic or informational messages that overlay the
CSECT and COMPILED fields. If the message is surrounded by plus signs (+++),
you can access extended help by pressing PF1. When you press PF3 to exit the
help, the CSECT and COMPILED fields are redisplayed. If extended help is not
available, simply press Enter to redisplay the fields.
COMPILED: Field Displays the date and time the program was compiled in
DD MMM YYYY format. When Xpediter/CICS issues a diagnostic or informational
message, the message displays instead of the compilation date and time.
When the text of the message is surrounded by plus signs (++), type HELP in the
COMMAND field and press Enter, or use PF1 (HELP), to obtain more detailed information
about the message.
Command Entry
Xpediter/CICS has many commands to assist you in your debugging tasks. There are
three ways of entering commands, but not every command can be entered in every way:
For specific information on command syntax, usage, and notation conventions, refer to
the Xpediter/CICS Quick Reference.
Primary Commands These commands are entered in the COMMAND field of any
screen.
Line Commands A subset of the primary commands, line commands are typed in
the line number area of the display (2.L screen) or in the prefix command field that
may precede the data displayed on a line.
PF Keys PF keys are set by default to the most commonly used commands; they are
executed simply by pressing the key. If you wish, you can reset the PF key
assignments as part of your user profile. See PF Key Settings on page 1-12.
Common Primary Commands

Some commonly used Xpediter/CICS primary commands are:
AFTER
Sets conditional or unconditional breakpoints after the execution of a statement or
instruction.
BEFORE
Sets conditional or unconditional breakpoints before the execution of a statement or
instruction.
CALC
Performs hexadecimal/decimal calculations and displays the results online.
COUNT
Sets execution counts and gathers test coverage statistics.
DELETE
Removes either a specific object or a dataset record, depending on the screen you access.
EXCLUDE
Excludes specified lines from display. You see only the lines of code in which you are
interested. When you step through a program, lines are redisplayed as they are executed
so you can see the logic flow of the program. Symbolic label support is provided so that
you can exclude a range of lines.
EXIT (PF4)
Transfers to the Exit Session screen.
FIND
Positions the cursor on a specified string. Can be used in conjunction with the EXCLUDE
command.
GO (PF12)
Executes program logic by the specified parameter. If no parameters are specified,
resumes execution from the current location. GO 5 1 will execute five statements,
pausing one second between each statement. GO UNTIL WA-HOURS executes until the
value of WA-HOURS changes.
GOTO
Used to reposition execution at another point in the program. Repositions the current
execution pointer to the specified statement, offset, or address.
GPREGS
Sets footing options to the general purpose registers.
HELP (PF1)
Displays hypertext online help. HELP COMMANDS displays a list of the available
commands. HELP NEWS gives information about the current release. Entering HELP on a
particular screen will display information about that screen.
KEEP
Selects the contents of a data item to be viewed in the scrollable and sizeable keep
window. To change displayed data, overtype it with a new value.
LOCATE * (PF6)
Transfers from any Xpediter screen directly to the Source Listing screen (2.L) or
Assembler Break/Abend screen (2.20).
REPEAT
Re-executes the last primary command.
RUNTO
Sets a one-time unconditional breakpoint before the execution of a statement or
instruction. GO will also be issued if you are at a trapped transaction.
SET
Changes debugging parameters:
KEEPS: Changes the size of the keep window.

JUSTIFICATION: Clips the current source listing so that extraneous data in the
source is removed from the display. SET JUSTIFICATION ON clips the lines and
suppresses all lines before the first and after the last source line in the display.
REGS: Specifies the display format (64 or 32) for the General Purpose registers shown
on the Assembler Break/Abend screen (2.20) and on the REGISTERS footing.
Ignored when CICS is not running on a z/Architecture machine.
SOURCE: Provides either a source or break/abend focus.
FOOT: Changes the data displayed in the FOOTING.
DATA: Displays hex result of last CALC command.
KEYS: Displays the PF key settings.
REGS: Displays current program register contents, assembler instruction, and
PSW for break/abend.
SOURCE: Displays five lines of source.
STATUS: Displays status of current task.
FLOAT: Displays current floating point register contents.
SHOW
Modifies the format of selected screens to display data in different forms.
SKIP
Temporarily bypasses the execution of a statement.
USING
Maps data according to a record format from a COBOL or PL/I program in the file utility.
VERIFY
Displays and, if desired, modifies Assembler object code.
WHEN
Sets conditions for pausing program execution.
Common Line Commands

Some commonly used Xpediter/CICS line commands are:
A (After)
Sets an unconditional breakpoint after a statement.
AC (After Conditional)
Sets a conditional breakpoint after a statement.
B (Before)
Sets an unconditional breakpoint before a statement.
BC (Before Conditional)
Sets a conditional breakpoint before a statement.
C/CC (Count)
Sets an execution analysis/count for a statement or range of statements.
D/DD (Delete)
Deletes Afters, Befores, Counts, Keeps, Runtos, Skips, conditional Skips, and Verifies for a
single line or range of statements.
DH (Delete Hex)
Reverts the display of contents of a kept data name from vertical hex format back to
standard format.
GT (Go To)
Repositions the execution pointer (=====>).
H (Hex)
Displays contents of a kept dataname in vertical hex format. DH reverts contents back to
standard format.
K/KK (Keep)
Selects one or more data names to be kept on a line or range of statements.
P (Peek)
Transfers to Working Storage screen (2.3) positioned to the first variable selected.
S/SS (Skip)
Indicates that the selected line or range of lines are to be skipped.
SC (Skip Conditional)
Indicates that the selected line is to be skipped if the specified condition is true.
X/XX (Exclude)
Excludes a line or range of lines.
Z (Runto)
Sets a one-time unconditional breakpoint before the execution of a statement or
instruction. GO will also be issued if you are at a trapped transaction.
PF Key Settings
Xpediter/CICS uses PF keys for command shortcuts. For example, to display HELP
information about the SHOW command, type SHOW in the COMMAND field and press
PF1 (HELP). You can elect to display the current PF key assignments at the bottom of your
non-menu screens. To set this option, use the SET FOOT KEYS command.
The default values for the PF keys are shown in Table 1-2. To customize the PF keys to suit
your individual needs, use the KEYS primary command.
Table 1-2. Default PF Key Settings
Function PF Key Description
HELP PF1 Provides help information on the function currently in use.
Generates a runto before breakpoint on the source line containing the cursor. If
RUNTO CSR PF2 you are at a trapped task, the GO command will also be issued, and the runto
breakpoint will be deleted when it is subsequently taken.
Ends current function and returns to the next higher level screen. For DB2
END PF3
screens only, returns to previous screen.
=X PF4 Transfers to the Exit Session screen.
When used with a previously issued FIND command, searches for the next
RFIND PF5
occurrence of the specified data.
Directly transfers from any screen to the Source Listing screen (2.L) or Assembler
LOCATE * PF6
Break/Abend screen (2.20).
UP PF7 Scrolls up through the data portion of a screen or the Help facility.
DOWN PF8 Scrolls down through the data portion of a screen or the Help facility.
Resumes program execution for one instruction or statement, then halts the
GO 1 PF9
program.
Scrolls the data portion of the screen to view data to the left of the current
LEFT PF10 display. On the Memory Display screens (2.2 and 9.2), PF10 acts as the PREV
command.
Scrolls the data portion of the screen to view data to the right of the current
RIGHT PF11 display. On the Memory Display screens (2.2 and 9.2), PF11 acts as the NEXT
command.
Steps through program logic by the specified parameters. If no parameters are
GO PF12 specified, resumes program from current location. This key is available in all
situations where resuming is allowed.
Ends the current Xpediter/CICS function and transfers to the highest level
MENU PF13 System Menu. From the Help facility or the Primary Menu, the copyright and
trade secret notices are displayed.
Transfers to the Memory Display screens (2.2). On the Primary Menu, PF14
MEMORY PF14
displays the copyright and trade secret notices.
Selects a function from a menu or selection screen, or lists the sixteen most
SELECT PF15
recently accessed addresses from the Memory Display screens (2.2 and 9.2).
Transfers to the Working Storage screen (2.3) for COBOL, the Defined Storage
WS, DS, or VS PF16
screen (2.3) for Assembler, or the Variable Storage screen (2.3) for PL/I and C.
=2.4 PF17 Transfers to the Program Trace screen (2.4).
=2.8 PF18 Transfers to the Last 3270 screen (2.8).
UP MAX PF19 Scrolls up the maximum amount possible.
DOWN MAX PF20 Scrolls down the maximum amount possible.
FILE PF21 Transfers to the File Utility Menu (5).
Scrolls the data in the keep window to view data to the left of the current
DLEFT PF22
display.
Scrolls the data in the keep window to view data to the right of the current
DRIGHT PF23
display.
Displays the last command entered in the COMMAND field, allowing it to be
RETRIEVE PF24
changed or reissued.
Update Password Security

The Update Security field provides security from memory updates on selected screens.
When this security is implemented by the Xpediter/CICS system administrator,
unauthorized users are prevented from making updates to the following screens:
2.2 Memory Display (XPED/XPRT)

2.D DSECTs (XPED/XPRT)
5.1.3 Edit CICS Dataset Record
5.2.3 Edit Queued Record
5.3.2 Edit Transient Data Queue Record
5.4.4 Edit DL/I Segment

5.5.5 DB2 Edit Result Table Row
5.5.6 DB2 Edit Composite Column
5.6.3 Update MQ Queue Message
9.2 Memory Display (XPSP)
9.D DSECTs (XPSP).
When this facility is enabled, the following field is displayed on the screen when using a
given transaction:
UPDATE PASSWORD: xxxxxxxx
Where xxxxxxxx is a non-displayed field used for entering the password.
To update memory displayed on the screen, enter the password and modify the data to be
changed before pressing Enter or a PF key. If no password is entered or the password is
invalid, all modifications to the data area of the screen are ignored. If memory is not
updated, you receive a message indicating why the update was bypassed.
2-1
Chapter 2.
Getting Started Chap 2
This chapter gives you the basic information needed to start using Xpediter/CICS. It
discusses the steps necessary to prepare your program for execution, including
compiling, processing, and loading a new copy. The chapter also discusses how to access,
navigate through, and exit Xpediter/CICS.
Take a few minutes to read this chapter before starting the exercises in this guide. It
answers many common questions.
Preparing a Program for Execution

It is possible to debug a program without any preparation other than entering XPED and
your program name. You work at the operation-code level, set breakpoints and examine
program storage using offsets. This process is called sourceless debugging. Sourceless
debugging is valuable when working with programs that cant be recompiled, such as
vendor packages or production versions of programs.
For examples of sourceless debugging, refer to Chapter 4, Debugging Applications

Without Source Code.
The typical method of debugging programs, however, is to use Xpediters source-level

support for COBOL.
To take advantage of this support, you must run your COBOL programs through the
COBOL language processor, which provides you with the following functionality during
a debugging session:
Set one or more breakpoints to stop execution at any statement. Breakpoints may be:
Unconditional: Halts program execution at the selected statement.
Conditional: Halts program execution only if the specified condition is met.
Examine program storage by data name.
Select data fields for viewing during program execution.
Resume execution at any statement.
Change the execution point by statement number.
Examine the statement-level trace during or after execution.
Language processing lets you work with the code in the way you are accustomed to
seeing it: at the source level. The next section discusses the Compuware language
processor and how to get source-level support.
The Compuware Language Processor

The Compuware language processor is a set of programs that captures information about
a compiler listing and stores it in a source listing file, also known as a DDIO file. You
have the option to use either the preprocessor or the postprocessor. As certain
information is not available from the compiler listing, Xpediter/CICS recommends that
you use the preprocessor when installing Release 17.02 because it gathers additional
information and provides you with the following benefits:
Simplified JCL: While the postprocessor requires that the user add a step after the
compile step, the preprocessor requires only that the EXEC name be altered and a
CWPDDIO DD card and CWPPRMO DD card be added.
Automated print options: The postprocessor requires that certain compiler options
be specified in order to print all needed sections of the compiler listing. The
preprocessor can automatically pass the required options to the compiler.
Capturing of suppressed source code: When COBOL COPY SUPPRESS is used,
sections of source code can be suppressed from the compiler listing. The preprocessor
can capture this information from the compiler before the data is suppressed from
the listing. This provides improved debugging under CICS.
To enable source-level support, the language processor must be installed. The most up to
date version of Compuware Shared Services is furnished with Xpediter/CICS and is
usually installed as part of the Xpediter installation process. For information on how to
install the Compuware Shared Services language processor, refer to the Xpediter/CICS
Installation and Configuration Guide and the Enterprise Common Components Installation and
Customization Guide.
During a debugging session, Xpediter/CICS searches the source listing file for an entry
that matches your program name. It also checks the compile date and time. For COBOL
programs, if a match is found, the source listing is used during the debugging session to
display source and to set breakpoints and keeps by statement number. If no match is
found, the NO SOURCE AVAILABLE message is displayed. Press the help PF key (default
PF1) for specific information.
Using the NEWCOPY Function

Whenever a program is recompiled, a new copy of the program must be loaded in CICS
before attempting to test the recompiled version with Xpediter/CICS. The Xpediter
NEWC transaction should be used instead of the CEMT transactions to load a new copy
of a program into CICS.
The NEWC transaction loads a new copy and resets generic breakpoints. Generic
breakpoints are those set without reference to a specific statement number or offset, such
as those created by the commands BEFORE ALL PARA and AFTER ALL EXEC. Explicit,
non-generic breakpoints are set with commands such as BEFORE 100 and AFTER +24 as
well as the line commands B, A, and C and are deleted from the new copy of the
program created with the NEWC transaction.
To use the NEWC transaction, type NEWC followed by the program name on a blank
CICS screen. If the NEWCOPY is successful, the following message is displayed:
NEWC CWDEMCB2
MXDNC0001I 01 Jan 2006 09:00:00 - SYSID=C123 - APPLID=CICSC123
Program 'CWDEMCB2' newcopy successful Len(00021E8)..
The program name in the first line of the message may be overtyped to issue an
additional NEWCOPY request.
If the program is in use or the program name is entered incorrectly, error messages are
returned. Any authorized user in the region can NEWCOPY a program; if the program is
in use, an error message is issued, but the program is not disabled.
For more information on the NEWCOPY function, refer to the Xpediter/CICS Reference
Manual.
Accessing Xpediter/CICS
There are three ways to access Xpediter/CICS:
Getting Started 2-3
Basic access
Fast-path access to the Source Listing screen (2.L)
Direct access to selected screens.
Any of the three transactions, XPED, XPRT, or XPSP, can be used with each method.
XPED and XPRT automatically issue the abend trap facility to trap any potential abends
in your program before they can actually occur.
Xpediter can also be configured to run in any of three restricted modes of operation:
Diagnosis Mode
Utilities Mode
Diagnosis/Utilities Mode.
For more information, see the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
Basic Access
The easiest way to access Xpediter/CICS is by entering XPED, XPRT, or XPSP on a blank
CICS screen and pressing Enter. XPED and XPRT take you to the Primary Menu shown in
Figure 2-1. XPSP takes you to a similar Primary Menu with additional functions for
system programmers. The Primary Menu will only display certain choices if the
corresponding Compuware product or functionalitysuch as Xpediter/Xchange,
Xpediter/Code Coverage, or CICSPlex supportis installed and active in the CICS region.
Figure 2-1. Primary Menu

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:





From the Primary Menu, you can:
Transfer to any of the options shown on the menu by typing the appropriate number
and pressing Enter.
Type a program name in the MODULE field and press the LOCATE * PF key (default
PF6) to transfer to the Source Listing screen (2.L).
Press Clear to return to CICS to start your application.
Fast-Path Access to the Source Listing screen (2.L)

To directly access the Source Listing screen (2.L), enter an Xpediter/CICS transaction,
followed by the load module name. This can be done, for example, by typing XPED
CWDEMCB2 and pressing Enter. The Source Listing screen (2.L) is displayed for the
Xpediter/CICS COBOL demonstration program CWDEMCB2. You can also specify a load
module and CSECT combination separated by a colon (:).
From here you can set breakpoints in your programs, select variables to keep for viewing,
set up an execution analysis, specify statements to be skipped, or transfer to another
screen.
Figure 2-2. Accessing the Source Listing Screen (2.L) Using the Fast-Path Method
--------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SOURCE LISTING (2.L) ----------------C123

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000300 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
000301 000-BEGIN-PROGRAM.
000302 EXEC CICS HANDLE AID
000303 CLEAR (800-RETURN-TO-CICS)
000304 END-EXEC.
000305 EXEC CICS ASSIGN
000306 SYSID(WS-SYSID)
000307 NOHANDLE
000308 END-EXEC.
000309
000310 IF EIBCALEN EQUAL ZERO
000311 NEXT SENTENCE
000312 ELSE
000313 GO TO 200-RECEIVE-INPUT.
000314
000315 100-SEND-INITIAL-SCREEN.
000316 MOVE WS-13 TO PAY13.
000317 MOVE '_____' TO PAYEMP1.
000318 MOVE '- ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER' TO PAYPROMPT.
000319 MOVE EIBTRNID TO LINE1-TRAN
Direct Access to Selected Screens

When you know the screen that you want to access, enter an Xpediter/CICS transaction,
followed by the screen ID. For example, type XPED 5 and press Enter to display the File
Utility Menu (5).
Navigating Through Xpediter/CICS

Xpediter/CICS uses techniques similar to ISPF to transfer from screen to screen. The
following methods are used to navigate through Xpediter/CICS:
Type one of the screen numbers from a displayed menu in the COMMAND field and
press Enter.
Move the cursor next to the desired screen number on a menu, type S, and press
Enter.
Transfer between screens by typing = followed by the screen ID. For example, type
=5.1 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to transfer to the CICS Datasets Menu
(5.1).
Use PF keys to transfer to commonly used screens. The PF keys and defaults for the
corresponding screens are as follows:
PF6 LOCATE * (2.L or 2.20)

Getting Started 2-5
PF13 Primary Menu

PF14 Memory Display screen (2.2)
PF16 Defined Storage screen (2.3)
PF17 Program Trace screen (2.4)
PF21 File Utility Menu (5).
Access the Source Listing screen (2.L) from any product screen with the LOCATE *
primary command. For more information, refer to the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
Exit Xpediter/CICS by typing =X in the COMMAND field and pressing Enter.
Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a Debugging Session

All of the breakpoints, skips, counts, and keeps you set are associated with your terminal.
When you finish testing, it is very important that you end your debugging session. This
frees up any resources that may have been used during the session (including abend traps
which intercept programs when they abend) and releases all breakpoints, keeps, skips,
and counts from your programs.
Ending a Session
1. Type =X in the COMMAND field on any Xpediter/CICS screen. If you are not
currently in Xpediter/CICS, type XPED X on a blank CICS screen. Press Enter. The
Exit Session screen (X) appears as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3. Exit Session Screen (X)
----------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - EXIT SESSION (X) ------------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

END SESSION: NO YES terminates the session, cleans up resources, and
frees any waiting remote tasks. NO returns to CICS
and leaves Xpediter active.

DUMP OPTION: YES YES forces a dump (or Abend-AID for CICS report) for
any active abends currently trapped by this terminal.
The site options for dump suppression have precedence.

POST SCRIPT: Script to execute at session termination.

PROGRAMS WITH BREAKS: 000
PROTECTION ENTRIES: 000
ACTIVE ABEND TRAPS: 001 (Individual trap entries set by this terminal)
WAITING TASKS: 000 (Active remote traps that have not been processed)

Press ENTER to process options.
2. Type Y (for YES) in the END SESSION field.

3. If you had trapped a transaction and would like a dump, type Y in the DUMP
OPTION field.
4. If you would like to execute a user or system script, type the script member name in
the POST SCRIPT field.
5. Press Enter. Xpediter/CICS displays the message XPEDITER/CICS SESSION
TERMINATED - SYSID=C123 to show that any resources used during the debugging
session are released.
You may also exit Xpediter directly, bypassing the Exit Session screen (X), by typing
XPND on a blank CICS screen.
The Resource Summary screen (1.P) can be used to release breakpoints set from the local
terminal, and the XPSP transactions Resource Summary screen (9.P) can be used to
release breakpoints from programs in the entire CICS region. This is especially helpful if
your site uses autoinstall terminals and you sign off CICS without ending an
Xpediter/CICS session. For more information, see the screen descriptions for the
Resource Summary screens (1.P and 9.P) in the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
3-1
Chapter 3.
Testing a COBOL Program Chap 3
This chapter demonstrates how to test a COBOL application program, first without
setting breakpoints, and then by setting breakpoints and stepping through the code. You
will use the XPED transaction to test an application transaction (XCB2) and fix an abend.
XCB2 is the sample demonstration transaction shipped with Xpediter/CICS. It is a simple
employee payroll transaction that executes the COBOL program CWDEMCB2. The XCB2
transaction is used throughout this guide to cause several types of abends.
If you have questions about which screen to use for a function, the Xpediter/CICS Quick
Reference contains a list of screen IDs and titles, default PF key settings, and commands.
Note: The demonstrations in this chapter should be performed in Xpediters standard

operating mode not one of the three restricted modes. For more information,
see the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
Testing without Breakpoints

1. On a blank CICS screen, type XPED and press Enter.
This activates Xpediter/CICS, sets the abend trap option, and displays the Primary
Menu as shown in Figure 3-1. The Primary Menu will only display certain choices if
the corresponding Compuware product or functionalitysuch as Xpediter/Xchange,
Xpediter/Code Coverage, or CICSPlex supportis installed and active in the CICS
region.

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:





Xpediter/CICS is now turned on and ready to intercept any abends that may occur.
2. Press Clear to return to CICS to start your test.
3. On a blank CICS screen, type XCB2 and press Enter. The Demonstration Transaction
screen appears as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2. Demonstration Transaction Screen
XCB2 _____ - ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER C123

*** COMPUWARE CORPORATION ***
DEMONSTRATION TRANSACTION

ENTER DESIRED EMPLOYEE ABOVE:
00001 - CAUSES ASRA ABEND
00002 - CAUSES AEIM (AND OTHER ABENDS)
00003 - CAUSES A WRITE TO TEMPORARY STORAGE
00004 - STARTS UP XCB2 AS AN ASYNCHRONOUS TASK
00005 - USED TO SHOW MULTIPLE CSECT SUPPORT
00333 - CAUSES A STORAGE VIOLATION OF A SAA
00999 - ENDS NORMALLY
4. To cause an ASRA abend, type 00001 and press Enter. The CWDEMCB2
demonstration program is intercepted when the abend occurs, and the Source Listing
screen (2.L) is displayed as shown in Figure 3-3. This gives you the opportunity to fix
the problem, re-execute the statement, and continue the test.
Note: The line numbers shown in this guide may vary from those seen during actual
program execution. The source for the EXEC CICS commands may also appear
different depending on the use of the CICS integrated translator.
Figure 3-3. Source Listing Screen (2.L) Showing an ASRA

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 CSECT: CWDEMCB2 COMPILED: 09 JUN 2005 - 11.23.01
LV ---- COBOL DATANAME KEEPS ---- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->
77 CURR-PAY 9(5)V99 NUM-DIS 0000000
02 WA-HOURS 999 NUM-DIS $$$
02 WA-RATE 9(3)V99 NUM-DIS 00950
**END**

------ ----------------------------- ASRA (DATA EXCEPTION) at CWDEMCB2.423 ->
000418 MOVE '*** EMPLOYEE NOT ON FILE ****' TO PAYPROMP
000419 GO TO 600-SEND-PAY-MAP.
000420
000421 300-EMPLOYEE-PAY-RTN.
000422 IF WA-TYPE EQUAL 'N' OR 'I' OR 'S'
=====> 1 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
000424 1 COMPUTE CURR-TAXES EQUAL CURR-PAY * WA-TAX-
000425 1 ADD CURR-PAY TO WA-YTD-GRS
000426 1 ADD CURR-TAXES TO WA-YTD-TAX.
000427
000428 IF PAYEMP1 EQUAL '00001'
000429 1 MOVE WORK-AREA TO PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001.
000430
The module and CSECT names and the compile date and time of the executing
program are displayed at the top of the screen. The keep window appears next. All
data items from the current statement automatically appear in the window.
You can scroll this window by positioning the cursor in it and using PF keys to scroll
up and down, left and right.
The status line is displayed after the keep window. The displayed message indicates
that an ASRA abend, caused by a data exception, has been intercepted at statement
423 in CWDEMCB2.
Testing a COBOL Program 3-3
The source code follows the status line. You can scroll through this section by
positioning the cursor anywhere on the screen outside the keep window. An arrow in
the statement number field indicates the current statement where execution is
paused.
5. The contents of other data items can be checked by using the PEEK primary
command. Type PEEK WA-TAX-RAT in the COMMAND field and press Enter.
Xpediter/CICS will transfer to the Working Storage screen (2.3) with the contents of
WA-TAX-RAT positioned to the top of the screen as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4. Working Storage Screen (2.3) Accessed with PEEK Command
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - WORKING STORAGE (2.3) ----------------C123


LV ---- COBOL DATANAME ---------- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->
02 WA-TAX-RAT 9(3)V9 NUM-DIS 0200
02 WA-YTD-GRS S9(5)V99 NUM-DIS +1500000
02 WA-YTD-TAX S9(5)V99 NUM-DIS +0300000
02 WA-MSG X(26)
01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD GROUP
02 EMP-NUM-KEY X(5) .....
02 EMP-NAME X(15) ...............
02 EMP-HOURS 999 NUM-DIS ...
02 EMP-TOTPAY 9(5)V99 NUM-DIS .......
02 FILLER X(50) ........................
01 EMP-RECORD-TABLE GROUP
02 EMP-RECORD-TBL GROUP
OCCURS 5 TIMES 1
03 EMP-NUM-KEY-TBL X(5) .....
OCCURS 5 TIMES 1
03 EMP-NAME-TBL X(15) ...............
OCCURS 5 TIMES 1
6. Press PF3 (END) to return to the Source Listing screen (2.L).

7. Note the value of WA-HOURS. The bad data ($$$) in this field is causing the ASRA. To
change it, position the cursor on the bad data, type 040, and press Enter.
8. Press PF9 (GO 1) to execute one line of code. Notice that the values of the data fields
in the keep window change as shown in Figure 3-5 on page 3-4.
Figure 3-5. After GO 1 on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****** STATEMENT 000423 EXECUTED STEP=00001 *******
* 77 CURR-PAY 9(5)V99 NUM-DIS 0038000
77 CURR-TAXES 9(5)V99 NUM-DIS 0000000
02 WA-TAX-RAT 9(3)V9 NUM-DIS 0200
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.424 ->
000418 MOVE '*** EMPLOYEE NOT ON FILE ****' TO PAYPROMP
000420
000423 1 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
=====> 1 COMPUTE CURR-TAXES EQUAL CURR-PAY * WA-TAX-
000425 1 ADD CURR-PAY TO WA-YTD-GRS
000426 1 ADD CURR-TAXES TO WA-YTD-TAX.
000427
000429 1 MOVE WORK-AREA TO PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001.
000430
9. Press PF12 (GO) to continue the test. If any other abends occur, Xpediter/CICS will
intercept them. Otherwise, the transaction completes, and the Demonstration
Transaction screen appears as shown in Figure 3-6.
*** COMPUWARE CORPORATION *** C123


EMPLOYEE NUMBER: 00001
EMPLOYEE NAME: MR. DAVID ABEND
HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 9.50
GROSS PAY: 380.00

*** TRANSACTION COMPLETE ***
10. Remember to end the session as described in Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a
Debugging Session on page 2-5.
In the example just completed, an ASRA occurred because WA-HOURS contained bad
data. In the next example, we will find out how the bad data got there.
Viewing Source
1. Use the fastpath method to quickly access program source. Type XPED
CWDEMCB2 on a blank CICS screen, and press Enter. The Source Listing screen (2.L)
appears (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7. Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000353 PROCEDURE DIVISION USING DFHEIBLK DFHCOMMAREA.
000355 *EXEC CICS HANDLE AID
000356 * CLEAR (800-RETURN-TO-CICS)
000357 *END-EXEC.
000358 MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
000359 CALL 'DFHEI1' USING DFHEIV0
000360 SERVICE LABEL
000361 GO TO 800-RETURN-TO-CICS DEPENDING ON DFHEIGDI
000363 1 NEXT SENTENCE
000364 ELSE
000365 1 GO TO 200-RECEIVE-INPUT.
000366
000369 MOVE '_____' TO PAYEMP1.
000372 PAYMSG10-TRAN.
During execution, Xpediter/CICS automatically displays the data names in the

current statement. In addition, you can select any number of data names to be
displayed during execution by specifying explicit keeps. Xpediter/CICS displays these
fields in the keep window of the screen when an abend or a breakpoint occurs. This
feature allows you to monitor data names and modify their values during program
execution.
A feature called Intelligent Autokeeps is an extension to Xpediters autokeep facility.
This feature is enabled by default, but can be disabled in your individual profile
settings. With Intelligent Autokeeps enabled, if an autokeep variable could be
modified by the execution of the current statement, it will be redisplayed in the keep
window when you step to the next statement. It is also marked with an asterisk in
column 2, as seen in Figure 3-5 on page 3-4. This intellikeep can often eliminate the
need to set, then later remove, an explicit keep. The Intelligent Autokeeps feature
will not display an autokeep if a duplicate explicit keep has been set.
Note: For a more complete explanation of autokeeps and the Intelligent Autokeeps
feature, Compuware encourages you to use the HELP AUTOKEEPS and HELP
INTELLIKEEPS commands built into Xpediter/CICS. These Help topics
provide highly detailed information and examples, as well as performing
real-time evaluations to point out any restrictions you might encounter
while attempting to use these facilities.
In the previous example, an abend occurred because the field WA-HOURS contained
invalid data. By setting a keep on this field before reexecuting the program, you can
view it to monitor its value and check its effect on the program execution.
2. To turn on the trace facility, type SET TRACE ON on the COMMAND line and press
Enter.
3. Type FIND FIRST WA-HOURS on the COMMAND line and press Enter. The display is
positioned to the declaration for WA-HOURS.
4. Type the K line command on the statement number to the left of WA-hours and press
Enter. The value of WA-HOURS will appear in the keep window when you execute the
program.
Whenever a keep is set, a K is placed on the line where the data is defined, as shown
in Figure 3-8 on page 3-6.
Figure 3-8. Selecting a Variable to Keep on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ************************ KEEP set *************************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000084 05 WA-YTD-TAX PIC S9(5)V99.
000085 K 05 WA-HOURS PIC 999.
000086 05 WA-MSG PIC X(26).
000087
000088 01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD.
000089 05 EMP-NUM-KEY PIC X(5).
000090 05 EMP-NAME PIC X(15).
000091 05 EMP-HOURS PIC 999.
000092 05 EMP-TOTPAY PIC 9(5)V99.
000093 05 FILLER PIC X(50).
000094
000095 01 EMP-RECORD-TABLE.
000096 03 EMP-RECORD-TBL OCCURS 5 TIMES.
000097 05 EMP-NUM-KEY-TBL PIC X(5).
000098 05 EMP-NAME-TBL PIC X(15).
000099 05 EMP-HOURS-TBL PIC 999.
000100 05 EMP-TOTPAY-TBL PIC 9(5)V99.
000101
000102 01 EMP-RECORD-LIST.
000103 05 EMP-NUM-LIST PIC X(5).
Setting Program Breakpoints

Next, we will set a breakpoint at the beginning of the program so that we can gain
control and see the initialized value of WA-HOURS.
Breakpoints are set to halt execution of the program. They are set at any executable verb
to be executed either before or after the statement is executed. There are two types of
breakpoints:
Unconditional Breakpoints: Halt program execution at the selected statement.

Intercepts, described in Intercept Summary (1.7) on page 3-12, are a subset of
unconditional breakpoints. Runtos are one-time before breakpoints. Setting a runto
breakpoint also issues the GO command if a task has been trapped at a break or stop.
After the runto breakpoint has been taken, it is deleted.
Conditional Breakpoints: Halt program execution only if the specified condition is
met.
In this case, we will set an unconditional breakpoint at the beginning of the program.
1. Type BEFORE 0 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. This sets a breakpoint on
the first executable statement in the program. Xpediter/CICS displays the message:
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************
to indicate a breakpoint has been set.

2. Type SHOW KEEPS on the COMMAND line and press Enter to see where keeps are set
(Figure 3-9).
The K indicates that a keep has been set for WA-HOURS.
Figure 3-9. Setting Keeps on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90 LINE(S) NOT DISPLAYED
000085 K 05 WA-HOURS PIC 999.
**************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **************************
3. To see where breakpoints have been set, type SHOW BREAKS and press Enter (Figure
3-10).
This screen displays all breakpoints that have been set. The B indicates a before
breakpoint has been set on the line.
Figure 3-10. Setting Breakpoints on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000358 B MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
**************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **************************
4. Type RESET and press Enter to display all lines of the source.
Executing the Program

In this example, you have set a breakpoint and selected one data field to be kept. The
program is now ready to test.
1. Press Clear to return to CICS.

2. Type XCB2 and press Enter. The first breakpoint in the program is taken (Figure 3-
11).

K 02 WA-HOURS 999 NUM-DIS ...
01 DFHEIV0 X(29) ........................
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.358 ->
000357 *END-EXEC.
=====> B MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
000364 ELSE
000366
3. Press PF12 (GO) to continue processing. The transaction screen appears.

4. Type 00001 and press Enter. The program stops again at the first statement.
In the previous example, CWDEMCB2 abended because WA-HOURS contained bad
data. You resolved the problem by changing the value of WA-HOURS to 040.
Note the value of WA-HOURS. At this point, the field is set to low values. Next, you
will use the GO UNTIL command to find out how WA-HOURS was set to $$$.
5. Type GO UNTIL WA-HOURS in the COMMAND line and press Enter. This command
tells Xpediter/CICS to execute the program until the contents of WA-HOURS
changes. Xpediter/CICS positions the display at a MOVE statement. You can see that
the contents of WA-HOURS has changed (Figure 3-12).
Notice that this MOVE statement does not directly reference WA-HOURS. WORK-
AREA is a group item that contains WA-HOURS. PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 is also a
group item. With Xpediter, you can go to the Working Storage screen (2.3) and take a
closer look at this group level to see where the $$$ came from.

COMMAND ===> GO UNTIL WA-HOURS SCROLL ===> CSR
MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****** "UNTIL" condition met, step execution halted *******
K 02 WA-HOURS 999 NUM-DIS $$$
01 PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 GROUP NMR. DAVID ABEND456 MAIN
01 WORK-AREA GROUP NMR. DAVID ABEND456 MAIN
**END**

------ ------------------------------------------------ After CWDEMCB2.403 ->
000400
000401 MOVE DUMMY-PAYEMP1 TO PAYEMP1.
====>> 1 MOVE PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 TO WORK-AREA
000404 1 GO TO 300-EMPLOYEE-PAY-RTN.
000406 1 GO TO 900-PROCESS-00002-SELECTION.
6. Clear the COMMAND line by pressing Erase EOF.
Note: The following step requires that CSR be entered in your SCROLL field.
7. Place the cursor on PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 in the keep window and press PF8 to
scroll it to the top of the keep window.
8. Press PF16 (WS) to display the Working Storage screen (2.3) as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13. Working Storage Screen (2.3)


LV ---- COBOL DATANAME ---------- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->
01 PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 GROUP
02 PAY001-TYPE X N
02 PAY001-NAME X(15) MR. DAVID ABEND
02 PAY001-ADDRESS GROUP
03 PAY001-STREET X(12) 456 MAIN ST.
03 PAY001-CITY X(8) HOMETOWN
03 PAY001-STATE XX MI
03 PAY001-ZIP X(5) 48010
02 PAY001-RATE 9(3)V99 NUM-DIS 00950
02 PAY001-DATE-EFF GROUP
03 PAY001-DTEFF-MM XX 01
03 PAY001-DTEFF-DD XX 01
03 PAY001-DTEFF-YY XX 84
02 PAY001-LST-PCT 9(3)V9 NUM-DIS 0110
02 PAY001-TAX-RAT 9(3)V9 NUM-DIS 0200
02 PAY001-YTD-GRS S9(5)V99 NUM-DIS +1500000
02 PAY001-YTD-TAX S9(5)V99 NUM-DIS +0300000
02 PAY001-HOURS XXX $$$
9. Type K, the keep line command, next to the PAY001-HOURS, 040 over $$$, and press
Enter. This changes the value and sets a keep.
Resuming Execution at Another Statement

To correct the value in WA-HOURS and avoid an abend, re-execute the statement that
originally moved bad data to WA-HOURS.
1. Press PF6 (LOCATE *) to return to the Source Listing screen (2.L).

2. Type GT on the IF PAYEMP1 EQUAL 00001 line and press Enter. This indicates that
execution is to be resumed at this line.
Notice that the values of the data field in the keep window change.
Stepping and Reviewing Program Execution

In this example, we will use the GO command to execute the program for a specified
number of statements.
1. Type GO 5 1 in the command line and press Enter. The following actions occur:
Five statements are executed with a one-second pause between each execution.
The execution pointer points to the current statement, which is highlighted.
The keep window displays the variable fields contained in the current statement
and those you selected for viewing.
The screen shows the statements that have executed and the number of steps
that are completed.
2. If you have the trace utility already turned on, press PF17 to transfer to the Program
Trace screen (2.4) (Figure 3-14). This screen shows the execution flow of your
program logic. You can scroll the information.
Figure 3-14. Program Trace Screen (2.4) Showing Program Logic Flow
--------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - PROGRAM TRACE (2.4) -----------------C123

TERM: 0751 ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.424
=======> TASK(00079) MODULE:CWDEMCB2 CSECT:CWDEMCB2 LANGUAGE:COBOL
000392 GO TO 500-MAPERR DEPENDING ON DFHEIGDI.
<BRANCH>
000397 MOVE '..{........ ...00303 ' TO DFHEIV0
000398 CALL 'DFHEI1' USING DFHEIV0 DUMMY-EMP DUMMY-LEN
000399
000400
000401 MOVE DUMMY-PAYEMP1 TO PAYEMP1.
<RESUMED TO NEW LOCATION, STATEMENT 402
000403 1 MOVE PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001 TO WORK-AREA
000404 1 GO TO 300-EMPLOYEE-PAY-RTN.
<BRANCH>
000423 1 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
******************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************
3. Press PF18 to display the Last 3270 screen (Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15. Last 3270 Screen
XCB2 00001 - ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER C123


4. Press Enter to return to the Program Trace screen (2.4).

5. Press PF6 (LOCATE *) to return to the Source Listing screen (2.L) and position to the
current statement.
6. Place the cursor on source statement 428, then press PF2 (RUNTO CSR). As shown in
Figure 3-16, execution will halt on statement 428 for the one-time runto breakpoint,
which is deleted automatically after it is taken.
Figure 3-16. PF2 (RUNTO CSR) on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ************** RUNTO breakpoint encountered ***************
K 02 PAY001-HOURS XXX 040
* 77 CURR-TAXES 9(5)V99 NUM-DIS 0760000
03 PAYEMP1 X(5) 00001
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.428 ->
000420
000423 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
000424 COMPUTE CURR-TAXES EQUAL CURR-PAY * WA-TAX-RAT
000425 ADD CURR-PAY TO WA-YTD-GRS
000426 ADD CURR-TAXES TO WA-YTD-TAX.
000427
=====> IF PAYEMP1 EQUAL '00001'
000429 MOVE WORK-AREA TO PAYROLL-DATA-EMP001.
000430
7. Press PF12 (GO) to resume execution (Figure 3-17).


HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 9.50
GROSS PAY: 380.00


Intercept Summary (1.7)

Before breakpoints can also be set using the Intercept Summary (1.7) screen. This
provides an easy method for entering multiple intercept commands at one time. Before
breakpoints set at the entry point of a CSECT are considered intercepts.
Note: Source listings must be available to set intercepts.
1. On a blank CICS screen, type XPED and press Enter.

2. Access the Intercept Summary screen by entering 7 on the Session Control Menu (1)
or by entering =1.7 in the COMMAND field.
If any current intercepts for your terminal exist at this time, they are displayed when
the initial screen appears, followed by lines with underscores to enter new data. You
can enter either the load module name or a load module and a CSECT name for
intercepts you want to set. If only the load module name is entered, it is propagated
into the CSECT name to set the intercept.
3. Type CWDEMCB2 on the first line under LOAD MODULE.
4. Type CWDEMCB2 on the second line under LOAD MODULE, then type CWCDSUBA
under CSECT. (See Figure 3-18.)
Figure 3-18. Intercept Summary (1.7)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - INTERCEPT SUMMARY (1.7) ---------------C123


LOAD
DEL MODULE CSECT LISTING OFFSET STATUS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ cwdemcb2 ________________
_ cwdemcb2 cwcdsuba
_ ________ ________________
_ ________ ________________
_ ________ ________________
_ ________ ________________
_ ________ ________________
5. Press Enter. The screen is refreshed and the result of each new line command is
displayed as shown in Figure 3-19. If the intercept was successfully set, the LISTING
and OFFSET fields are updated and the STATUS column shows INTERCEPT SET.
Figure 3-19. Intercept Summary with Intercept Set
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - INTERCEPT SUMMARY (1.7) ---------------C123

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 +++++++++++ 2 command(s) complete. Use help key +++++++++++

LOAD
DEL MODULE CSECT LISTING OFFSET STATUS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ CWDEMCB2 CWDEMCB2 CWDEMCB2 00000C5E INTERCEPT SET
_ CWDEMCB2 CWCDSUBA CWCDSUBA 00000000 INTERCEPT SET
_ ________ ________
_ ________ ________
_ ________ ________
_ ________ ________
_ ________ ________
If there was an error, the data in error is highlighted and an error message is
displayed under STATUS. In our example, both intercepts were successfully set.
6. Clear your screen.
7. Enter XCB2. As shown in Figure 3-20, a before breakpoint is taken at the entry point
of CWDEMCB2.
Figure 3-20. Before Breakpoint Taken

01 DFHEIV0 X(29) ........................
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.358 ->
000357 *END-EXEC.
=====> B MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
000364 ELSE
000366
8. After taking the first intercept at the entry point of CWDEMCB2, press PF12 to
continue the program and display the Demonstration Transaction screen requesting
the employee number (Figure 3-21).


9. Enter 00005 and press Enter. The initial intercept in CWDEMCB2 is taken again.
10. Press PF12 to continue. The second intercept in CWCDSUBA is taken as shown in
Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22. Second Intercept in CWCDSUBA

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 CSECT: CWCDSUBA COMPILED: 09 JUN 2005 - 11.23.01
------- DATA LABEL KEEPS -------- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->

------ ------------------------------------------------ Before CWCDSUBA.26 ->
=====> B 000000 90EC D00C STM R14,R12,12(R13) SAVE CAL
000027 000004 05C0 BALR R12,0 ESTABLIS
000028 R:C USING *,R12 REG 12 I
------ ASMA303W ** WARNING ** Multiple address resolutions may result from
------ ASMA435I ** WARNING ** Record 28 in XD.TEST.SOURCE(CWCDSUBA) on vol
000029 000006 5840 1004 L R4,4(,R1) A(WORK A
000030 R:4 USING CWCDWRK,R4
000031 00000A D77B 4000 4000 XC 0(WRKLEN,R4),0(R4) CLEAR
000032 000010 50D0 401C ST R13,SAVEAREA+4
000033 000014 41F0 4018 LA R15,SAVEAREA
000034 000018 50FD 0008 ST R15,8(R13)
000035 00001C 18DF LR R13,R15
000036 * START PAYROLL PROCESSING.....
000037 00001E 5820 1000 L R2,0(,R1) LOAD ADD
11. You can now end your debugging session as described in Exiting Xpediter/CICS and
Ending a Debugging Session on page 2-5.
Using Enhanced Traps

Setting Program Breakpoints on page 3-6 gave an example of how to set a breakpoint to
halt execution. In this section, we will create enhanced traps and discuss their affect on
program execution and abends.
Enhanced trapping is an extension of regular trapping. A trap can be enhanced so

breakpoints and abends are only taken when the specified condition is met. That
condition can be a value in the initial COMMAREA (ICA), in a specific big commarea
container (CONT+containername), MQ message descriptor (MQMD), or MQ message data
(MQD). For more information, see the description of the Trap Summary screen (1.6 or
9.6) in the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
Setting an Enhanced Trap on Initial COMMAREA (ICA)

Note: If you are using channels and containers instead of commareas, skip to Setting
an Enhanced Trap Using Containers (CONT) on page 3-18.
1. Type XPED CWDEMCB2 on a blank CICS screen and press Enter. Program
CWDEMCB2 is displayed on the Source Listing screen (2.L) as shown in Figure 3-23
on page 3-15.
Figure 3-23. CWDEMCB2 on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000357 *END-EXEC.
000358 MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
000364 ELSE
000366
000369 MOVE '_____' TO PAYEMP1.
2. Type BEFORE 0 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. This sets a before breakpoint
on the first executable statement in CWDEMCB2. As shown in Figure 3-24, Xpediter
displays the message
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************
Figure 3-24. Setting a Breakpoint on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 *********************** BEFORE SET ************************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000357 *END-EXEC.
000358 B MOVE ' 00278 ' TO DFHEIV
000364 ELSE
000366
000369 MOVE '_____' TO PAYEMP1.
Note: If your profile specifies TRAP=ON, starting Xpediter automatically creates a trap
based on netname and terminal ID. If TRAP=OFF, the trap is created when you set
a breakpoint.
3. Type =1.6 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The Trap Summary screen (1.6) is
displayed (Figure 3-25) showing the trap Xpediter automatically created based on
netname and terminal ID.
The breakpoints you set will only be taken when the task is running on netname
ACME0027 and terminal 0027. Abends for that netname and terminal will also be
trapped.
Figure 3-25. Displaying a Trap on the Trap Summary Screen (1.6)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - TRAP SUMMARY (1.6) -----------------C123

MODE: TERM (IP TERM or ALL) NO IP TRAPS ENTRY 000001
LINE COMMANDS: A (After) B (Before) C (Copy) D (Delete) I (Insert)
M (Move) S (Save)

CMD USERID NETNAME TERM TRAN PROGRAM TRAP ABEND
IF ...................... TRAP CONDITION .......................
----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
4. To create an enhanced trap, type ICA(26:4)=T'TEST' in the trap condition field on

the second line of the trap entry following the word IF and press Enter.
Figure 3-26. Enhanced Trap for Initial COMMAREA

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF ICA(26:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
This enhanced trap causes Xpediter to take breakpoints and trap abends only when
both of the following conditions are met:
The task is running on netname ACME0027 and terminal 0027, and
The initial DFHCOMMAREA has a value of TEST in the four characters starting at
position 26.
The literal T'TEST' could also have been entered as 'TEST' without the preceding type
specification of T. Because this text type literal is not case-sensitive, you could also
have entered T'test', 'Test', or 'TeSt'.
5. The enhanced trap could also be modified to eliminate the netname and terminal ID
requirements. As shown in Figure 3-27, overtype ACME0027 in the NETNAME field
and 0027 in the TERM field with all asterisks (*), type CWDEMCB2 in the PROGRAM
field, and press Enter.
This type of enhanced trap is useful if there are hundreds of terminals executing a
single program, but you only want to stop in that program when the initial
COMMAREA contains the specified value.
Figure 3-27. Enhanced Trap for All Netnames and Terminal IDs Running CWDEMCB2

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** **** **** CWDEMCB2 YES
IF ICA(26:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
6. To see how this enhanced trap functions, first press Clear.

7. On the blank CICS screen, type XCB2 and press Enter. The Demonstration
Transaction screen is displayed as shown in Figure 3-28.


Notice that the trap was not taken by Xpediter/CICS. This is because the initial
invocation of the pseudo-conversational transaction XCB2 does not contain a
COMMAREA for the trap criteria to match.
8. Type 00999 for the employee number and press Enter. Now Xpediter traps the
transaction as shown in Figure 3-29 on page 3-18. This is because the second
invocation of the transaction was passed an initial COMMAREA containing the
characters TEST in positions 26 through 29 (26:4).
Figure 3-29. Taking an Enhanced Trap for Initial COMMAREA


------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.375 ->
=====> B 000-BEGIN-PROGRAM.
000378 *END-EXEC.
000379 MOVE ' 00302 ' TO DFHEIV
000383 *EXEC CICS ASSIGN
000384 * SYSID(WS-SYSID)
000385 * NOHANDLE
000386 *END-EXEC.
000387 MOVE ' 00305 ' TO DFHEIV
9. To confirm that the initial COMMAREA satisfied your enhanced trap criteria, first
transfer to the Memory Display screen (2.2) by typing =2.2 in the COMMAND field
and pressing Enter.
10. Type ICA (for Initial Common Area) in the TABLE/AREA field and press Enter.
Xpediter displays the contents of the COMMAREA as shown in Figure 3-30. Notice
the characters TEST starting 26 bytes (relative to 1) into the initial COMMAREA.
Figure 3-30. Verifying Enhanced Trap for Initial COMMAREA
--------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - MEMORY DISPLAY (2.2) ----------------C123

TABLE/AREA: ICA TABLE ENTRY ID: ________
ADDRESS: 382037E8 HEX OFFSET: _______________________________
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ EUDSA

CCSID TYPE: EBCDIC
00000000 000 C3969494 81998581 7A40E385 A7A37AE3 * Commarea: Text:T * 382037E8
00000010 010 C5E2E340 C3888199 7AE385A2 A340C1A2 * EST Char:Test As * 382037F8
00000020 020 8389897A 4C4D6E6F 40C885A7 7A40E385 * cii:<(>? Hex: Te * 38203808
00000030 030 A2A34040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * st * 38203818
00000040 040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * * 38203828
00000050 050 E4F0F0F0 F0F1F9F4 E4F0F0F0 F0F1F9F4 * U0000194U0000194 * 38203838
00000060 060 4C4CD9E4 E6D76E6E 0000E840 00000000 * <<RUWP>>..Y .... * 38203848
00000070 070 0000E840 0000E840 0000E840 38203870 * ..Y ..Y ..Y .... * 38203858
00000080 080 00010000 4B4B4B4B 4C4CD9E4 E6C26E6E * ........<<RUWB>> * 38203868
00000090 090 40404040 40404040 C3C5C5D4 C5D5E4F2 * CEEMENU2 * 38203878
000000A0 0A0 00000000 B9888000 00000001 00000000 * .....h.......... * 38203888
000000B0 0B0 C5D5E460 00000001 00000000 E4E26060 * ENU-........US-- * 38203898
000000C0 0C0 E2E8E2D6 E4E34040 40404040 40404040 * SYSOUT * 382038A8
000000D0 0D0 40404040 40404040 00100478 00000000 * ........ * 382038B8
000000E0 0E0 38205720 F840401D C5D4E7C2 00744042 * ....8 .EMXB.. . * 382038C8
000000F0 0F0 40404040 40404040 C3C5C5D4 C5D5E4F2 * CEEMENU2 * 382038D8
11. End your debugging session by typing XPND on a blank CICS screen and pressing
Enter.
Setting an Enhanced Trap Using Containers (CONT)

1. Type XPED CWDEMCCH on a blank CICS screen and press Enter. Program
CWDEMCCH is displayed on the Source Listing screen (2.L) as shown in Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31. CWDEMCCH on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCCH CSECT: CWDEMCCH COMPILED: 29 JUN 2005 - 17.21.01
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000398 PROCEDURE DIVISION using dfheiblk dfhcommarea.
000402 *END-EXEC.
000403 Call 'DFHEI1' using by content x'020680000705000
000404 - '0000000000000000f0f0f3f0f6404040' end-call
000405 Service label
000406 Go to 800-RETURN-TO-CICS depending on dfheigdi
000407
000410 * NOHANDLE
000411 *END-EXEC.
000412 Call 'DFHEI1' using by content x'020880002720000
000413 - '0000000000000000f0f0f3f0f9404040' by reference
000414 end-call.
000415
000416
000417 *EXEC CICS HANDLE CONDITION
2. Type BEFORE 0 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. This sets a before breakpoint
on the first executable statement in CWDEMCCH. As shown in Figure 3-32, Xpediter
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************

MODULE: CWDEMCCH *********************** BEFORE SET ************************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000402 *END-EXEC.
000403 B Call 'DFHEI1' using by content x'020680000705000
000404 - '0000000000000000f0f0f3f0f6404040' end-call
000407
a breakpoint.
trapped.

MODE: ALL (IP TERM or ALL) ENTRY 000001
M (Move) S (Save)
NETNAME/ TERM/ TRAP
CMD USERID CLIENT IP SERVER IP PORT TRAN PROGRAM ABEND
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ _______________ _______________ _____ ____ ________ ___
IF
4. To create an enhanced trap, type CONT+CCHREPCOMMAREA (26:4)=T'TEST' in the

trap condition field on the second line of the trap entry following the word IF and
press Enter.
Figure 3-34. Enhanced Trap for Container CCHREPCOMMAREA

M (Move) S (Save)
NETNAME/ TERM/ TRAP
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF CONT+CCHREPCOMMAREA(26:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ _______________ _______________ _____ ____ ________ ___
IF
both of the following conditions are met:
The task is running on netname ACME0027 and terminal 0027, and
The program has access to container CCHREPCOMMAREA and it has a value of
TEST in the four characters starting at position 26.
The literal T'TEST' could also have been entered as 'TEST' without the preceding type
specification of T. Because this text type literal is not case-sensitive, you could also
have entered T'test', 'Test', or 'TeSt'.
5. The enhanced trap could also be modified to eliminate the netname and terminal ID
requirements. As shown in Figure 3-35, overtype ACME0027 in the NETNAME field
and 0027 in the TERM field with all asterisks (*), type CWDEMCCH in the
PROGRAM field, and press Enter.
This type of enhanced trap is useful if there are hundreds of terminals executing a
single program, but you only want to stop in that program when the programs
container, CCHREPCOMMAREA, contains the specified value.
Figure 3-35. Enhanced Trap for All Netnames and Terminal IDs Running CWDEMCCH

M (Move) S (Save)
NETNAME/ TERM/ TRAP
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** **** **** CWDEMCCH YES
IF CONT+CCHREPCOMMAREA(26:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ _______________ _______________ _____ ____ ________ ___
IF
6. To see how this enhanced trap functions, first press Clear.

7. On the blank CICS screen, type XCCH and press Enter. The Demonstration
Transaction screen is displayed as shown in Figure 3-36.
XCCH _____ - ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER C123


00004 - STARTS UP XCCH AS AN ASYNCHRONOUS TASK
Notice that the trap was not taken by Xpediter/CICS. This is because the initial
invocation of the pseudo-conversational transaction XCCH does not have a
container named CCHREPCOMMAREA with data for the trap criteria to match.
8. Type 00999 for the employee number and press Enter. Now Xpediter traps the
transaction as shown in Figure 3-37 on page 3-22. This is because the second
invocation of the transaction was passed a container named CCHREPCOMMAREA
with the characters TEST in positions 26 through 29 (26:4).
Figure 3-37. Taking an Enhanced Trap for Container CCHREPCOMMAREA


------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCCH.403 ->
000402 *END-EXEC.
=====> B Call 'DFHEI1' using by content x'020680000705000
000404 - '0000000000000000f0f0f3f0f6404040' end-call
000407
000410 * NOHANDLE
000411 *END-EXEC.
9. To confirm that the data in container CCHREPCOMMAREA satisfied your enhanced

trap criteria, transfer to the Browse Container Data screen by typing =2.C.3 in the
COMMAND field and pressing Enter. The current input channel and container
appear as the defaults and TEST is displayed starting in position 26 of the container
data in container CCHREPCOMMAREA as shown in Figure 3-38. This data is
displayed in this sample in HEX OFF mode to show character format only. If you
want to display another containers data, you can simply enter the new container
name in the CONTAINER field and press Enter. To view a container on another
channel, you must also enter the new channel name.
Figure 3-38. Confirm that Container Data Satisfied Enhanced Trap Criteria
---------------- XPEDITER/CICS - BROWSE CONTAINER DATA (2.C.3) ------------C123


TASK: 00200 PROGRAM: CWDEMCCH
CHANNEL: CCHCHANNEL CONTAINER: CCHREPCOMMAREA
DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: 000000 CONTAINER-LENGTH: 0000000080
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
Commarea: Text:TEST Char:Test Ascii:<(>? Hex: Test
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
Enter.
Setting an Enhanced Trap on MQ Message Descriptor (MQMD)

1. Type XPED CSQ4CVB1 on a blank CICS screen and press Enter. The IBM-supplied
sample IBM MQ for z/OS program CSQ4CVB1 is displayed on the Source Listing
screen (2.L) as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39. CSQ4CVB1 on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 CSECT: CSQ4CVB1 COMPILED: 28 JUN 2002 - 15.00.43
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002896 MOVE SPACES TO M00-MESSAGE.
002897 MOVE LOW-VALUES TO CSQ4VB1O.
002898 *
002899 PERFORM INQUIRE-DEPTH
002900 *
002901 * If the depth cannot be obtained, there is no pos
002902 * that the program can work - so exit with a messa
002903 *
002904 IF M00-MESSAGE NOT = SPACES THEN
002905 1 STRING EIBTRNID
002906 1 M01-MESSAGE-14
002907 1 DELIMITED BY SIZE INTO M00-MESSAGE
002908 1 GO TO A-MAIN-EXIT
002909 END-IF.
002910 *
002911 *EXEC CICS IGNORE CONDITION
002912 * MAPFAIL
002913 *END-EXEC.
002914 MOVE ' 00630 ' TO DFHEIV
002915 CALL 'DFHEI1' USING DFHEIV0.
2. Type BEFORE 2896 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. This sets a before
breakpoint on statement 2896. As shown in Figure 3-40 on page 3-23, Xpediter
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 *********************** BEFORE SET ***********************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002896 B MOVE SPACES TO M00-MESSAGE.
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
a breakpoint.
trapped.

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
4. To create an enhanced trap on MQ message descriptor, overtype ACME0027 in the

NETNAME field and 0027 in the TERM field with all asterisks (*), type CSQ4CVB1 in
the PROGRAM field, type MQMD(196:8)=T'TESTUSER' in the trap condition field on
the second line of the trap entry following the word IF, and press Enter.
Figure 3-42. Enhanced Trap for MQ Message Descriptor

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** **** **** CSQ4CVB1 YES
IF MQMD(196:8) = T'TESTUSER'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
the MQ message descriptor has a value of TESTUSER in the MQMD_USERIDENTIFIER
area (the eight characters starting at position 196).
Note: Any breakpoint dependent on MQ information can only be taken after a

successful MQGET. If a breakpoint with a trap dependent on MQ information is
encountered before the MQGET in a program, the breakpoint will never be taken.
The literal T'TESTUSER' could also have been entered as 'TESTUSER' without the
preceding type specification of T. Because this text type literal is not case-sensitive,
you could also have entered T'testuser', 'Testuser', or 'TeStUsEr'.
This type of trap is useful for enabling enhanced breakpoints in programs for non-
terminal tasks. The transaction that initiates CSQ4CVB1 can be started from any
platform anywhere on the network, and Xpediter will pause execution at the
breakpoint if the specified MQ message descriptor condition is met.
Enter.
Setting an Enhanced Trap on MQ Message Data (MQD)


------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
002906 1 M01-MESSAGE-14
002909 END-IF.
002910 *
002912 * MAPFAIL
002913 *END-EXEC.
002914 MOVE ' 00630 ' TO DFHEIV
2. Type BEFORE 2896 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. This sets a before
breakpoint on statement 2896. As shown in Figure 3-44 on page 3-25, Xpediter
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 *********************** BEFORE SET ***********************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
a breakpoint.
trapped.

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
4. To create an enhanced trap on MQ message data, overtype ACME0027 in the

NETNAME field and 0027 in the TERM field with all asterisks (*), type CSQ4CVB1 in
the PROGRAM field, type MQD(1:7)=T'1234567' in the trap condition field on the
second line of the trap entry following the word IF, and press Enter.
Figure 3-46. Enhanced Trap for MQ Message Data

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** **** **** CSQ4CVB1 YES
IF MQD(1:7) = T'1234567'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
the MQ message data has a value of 1234567 for the seven characters starting at
position 1.
Note: Any breakpoint dependent on MQ information can only be taken after a

successful MQGET. If a breakpoint with a trap dependent on MQ information is
encountered before the MQGET in a program, the breakpoint will never be taken.
The literal T'1234567' could also have been entered as '1234567' without the
preceding type specification of T.
This type of trap is useful for enabling enhanced breakpoints in programs for non-
terminal tasks. The transaction that initiates CSQ4CVB1 can be started from any
platform anywhere on the network, and Xpediter will pause execution at the
breakpoint if the specified MQ message data condition is met.
Enter.
Using Enhanced Breakpoints

Using Enhanced Traps on page 3-14 demonstrated how traps can be enhanced so
breakpoints are taken only when a specific condition is met, based on ICA, CONT,
MQMD, or MQD information. Enhanced breakpoints allow us to set conditional
breakpoints that are taken based on ICA, CONT, MQMD, or MQD information after the
trap conditions are met.
Setting an Enhanced Breakpoint


------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
002906 1 M01-MESSAGE-14
002909 END-IF.
002910 *
002912 * MAPFAIL
002913 *END-EXEC.
002914 MOVE ' 00630 ' TO DFHEIV
2. Type BC on statement number 2896 and press Enter. This sets a before conditional
breakpoint on the statement and opens an IF line for entering a condition as shown
in Figure 3-48 on page 3-27. Xpediter also displays the message
*********************** BEFORE SET ************************
Figure 3-48. Setting a Conditional Breakpoint on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 *********************** BEFORE SET ************************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
-COND- IF
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
3. Type MQMD(196:8)=T'TESTUSER' in the IF field and press Enter. This specifies an

enhanced breakpoint condition of the MQ message descriptor having a value of
TESTUSER in the MQMD_USERIDENTIFIER area (the eight characters starting at
position 196). Xpediter also displays the message
******************* BEFORE(S) REPLACED ********************

Figure 3-49. Specifying Enhanced Breakpoint Condition on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 ******************* BEFORE(S) REPLACED ********************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
-COND- IF MQMD(196:8) = T'TESTUSER'
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
a breakpoint.
The enhanced conditions for the breakpoint you set will be evaluated only when the
task is running on netname ACME0027 and terminal 0027. The breakpoint will be
taken only when the data at MQMD(198:6) is TESTUSER. Abends for that netname
and terminal will also be trapped.

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
Enter.
Combining Enhanced Breakpoints and Enhanced Traps

By combining enhanced breakpoints and enhanced traps you can specify complex sets of
conditions. In the following scenario, assume you want Xpediter to take breakpoints only
when the enhanced trap condition ICA(33:7)=T'1234567' is met. But you also want the
breakpoint on one particular statement to be taken only if the enhanced breakpoint
condition ICA(1:4)=T'CPWR' is met.

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
002906 1 M01-MESSAGE-14
002909 END-IF.
002910 *
002912 * MAPFAIL
002913 *END-EXEC.
002914 MOVE ' 00630 ' TO DFHEIV
2. Set three breakpoints as follows:

a. Type B on statement number 2897.
b. Type B on statement number 2914.
c. Type BC on statement number 2904 and press Enter.
d. Type ICA(1:4)=T'CPWR' in the IF field and press Enter. This specifies an
enhanced breakpoint condition of the initial COMMAREA having a value of
CPWR in the four characters starting at position 1. The breakpoints will be
displayed as shown in Figure 3-52 on page 3-29.
Figure 3-52. Setting Three Breakpoints on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CSQ4CVB1 ******************* BEFORE(S) REPLACED ********************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
002897 B MOVE LOW-VALUES TO CSQ4VB1O.
002898 *
002900 *
002903 *
002904 B IF M00-MESSAGE NOT = SPACES THEN
-COND- IF ICA(1:4) = T'CPWR'
002906 1 M01-MESSAGE-14
002909 END-IF.
002910 *
002912 * MAPFAIL
002913 *END-EXEC.
002914 B MOVE ' 00630 ' TO DFHEIV
a breakpoint.
None of the breakpoints you set will be taken unless the task is running on netname
ACME0027 and terminal 0027. The conditional breakpoint on statement 2904 will be
taken only if the trap condition and the enhanced condition ICA(1:4)=T'CPWR' are
both met.

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
4. To create an enhanced trap on initial COMMAREA (INITCOMM) data, type

ICA(33:7)=T'1234567' in the trap condition field on the second line of the trap entry
following the word IF and press Enter.
Figure 3-54. Enhanced Trap for Initial COMMAREA (INITCOMM) Data

M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ACME0027 0027 **** ******** YES
IF ICA(33:7) = T'1234567'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
the initial COMMAREA has a value of 1234567 for the seven characters starting at
position 33.
None of the breakpoints you set will be taken unless the task is running on netname
ACME0027 and terminal 0027 and the enhanced condition ICA(33:7)=T'1234567' is
met. The conditional breakpoint on statement 2904 will be taken only if the trap
condition and the enhanced condition ICA(1:4)=T'CPWR' are both met.
Optimization Considerations
COBOL programs that are optimized using compiler options or using the CA-
OPTIMIZER compiler can be symbolically debugged with Xpediter/CICS. Depending on
the optimizing algorithm employed, execution trace, code stepping, and resuming
execution at another statement under Xpediter/CICS can appear to be incorrect.
An OPT indicator is displayed near the upper right corner of the screen if a C, COBOL, or
PL/I program has been compiled with some level of optimization or inlining, as shown in
Figure 3-55. For COBOL 5.1 and above, OPT(n) is displayed, where n is the level of
optimization. For optimized C programs, either OPT or OPT(n) is displayed, depending on
the level of optimization.
Figure 3-55. OPT Indicator on Source Listing (2.L) Screen
--------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SOURCE LISTING (2.L) --------OPT(1)--C123

LV ----- COBOL DATANAME KEEPS ---- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->
**END**

000356
The optimization technique used by high level language compilers attempts to improve
the run-time performance of application programs. The methods typically used involve
the rearrangement of object code to the point where there may be little correspondence
between the sequence of generated machine instructions and the sequence of the source
statements generated by the programmer.
Whether debugging is performed through specialized debugging software such as

Xpediter/CICS, or through the conventional method of manually reading dumps and
matching them to compile listings, the process is more complicated when optimization
has been used. In circumstances where code has been relocated and/or re-sequenced by
optimization, it may be much more difficult to debug logic path problems.
4-1
Chapter 4.
Debugging Applications Without Source Code Chap 4
As discussed in Preparing a Program for Execution on page 2-1, the typical

Xpediter/CICS test begins by processing the application program with the Compuware
language processor. This process creates an online source listing that allows you to
interactively step through your source code as it executes. However, if this source listing
is not available, you can still test your programs with Xpediter/CICS using a form of
testing called sourceless debugging.
This chapter demonstrates two methods for using sourceless debugging when testing
your applications: PSEUDOSOURCE and Line Mode. You can still use Xpediter/CICS to
set breakpoints, intercept abends, step through instructions, modify data, and generally
test your program.
The PSEUDOSOURCE command allows you to map a program or CSECT to create an

Assembler pseudo-listing. This pseudo-listing displays the underlying instructions in
memory as if it was an Assembler program processed by the Compuware Assembler
Language Processor. While you need some experience in debugging assembler language,
the capability to debug a program or CSECT from an Assembler pseudo-listing provides
you with a much richer set of commands. It is important to understand that debugging a
COBOL program using PSEUDOSOURCE is not a trivial undertaking. Having a compiler
listing can make the task easier, but is not a requirement.
Line Mode debugging, although somewhat more complicated than using a pseudo-listing
produced by the PSEUDOSOURCE command, still provides a set of commands that allow
sourceless debugging of a COBOL program. Since you do not have a pseudo-listing
available, you are restricted to using offsets and working with a single assembler
instruction. In Line Mode, having a copy of the compiler listing is of tremendous help.
You also need to be able to decipher assembler instructions by looking at the
hexadecimal display of storage that can be obtained from the 2.2 screen.
The following scenario is based on the application transaction XCB2. This is the sample
payroll transaction shipped with Xpediter/CICS that executes the COBOL program
CWDEMCB2. Since sourceless debugging mandates that no source listing exists for the
program in question, you may wish to use a program of your own.

When to Use Sourceless Debugging

Xpediter/CICS attempts to map your program to source whenever possible. It defaults to
sourceless mode only if no corresponding source can be found. This is most likely due to
one of the following situations:
The program was not processed using the Compuware language processor.
A version of the language processor no longer supported was used.
The language processor step did not complete successfully.
The source listing dataset is not defined (or incorrectly defined) to your CICS region.
The load module timestamp does not match the Xpediter/CICS source timestamp
because:
The program was linked into a library other than the one in use under CICS.
Check your CICS library concatenation.
A new copy of the load module was not brought into storage.
Pressing the help PF key (default PF1) will display specific information on why no source
is available.
Preparing for Sourceless Debugging

By definition, sourceless debugging only takes place if source does not exist in the
Xpediter/CICS source listing dataset for a module. Program CWDEMCB2 has already been
processed for use in other chapters of this guide. As a result, to continue with this
section, you must first disable any Xpediter/CICS source listing for CWDEMCB2. As an
alternative, you could follow the examples using your own program that has not been
processed with the Compuware language processor.
Type =2.6.1 in the COMMAND field and CWDEMCB2 in the PROGRAM field, then press
Enter to go to the List of CSECTs screen (2.6.1). Overtype CWDEMCB2 in the LISTING
column with XXDEMCB2 and press Enter to disable the source listing. Be sure to change
the name back to CWDEMCB2 when you have completed the procedures in this chapter,
or simply end your Xpediter session.
The following scenario contains examples of debugging a COBOL program without

source. Please note that your results may vary from those illustrated in the examples. To
follow the scenario in this chapter, refer to a hardcopy of the listing of program
CWDEMCB2.
Using PSEUDOSOURCE
Sourceless Debugging without Breakpoints
1. On a blank screen, type XPED and press Enter. This activates Xpediter/CICS for your
terminal, turns on the abend trap option, and displays the Primary Menu as show in
Figure 4-1.
Debugging Applications Without Source Code 4-3

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:





Xpediter/CICS is now turned ON and ready to intercept any abends associated with
your terminal and programs.
2. To enable the display of the OFFSET field in Assembler programs, type SET JUST OFF
in the COMMAND field and press Enter.
3. Type PSEUDOSOURCE CWDEMCB2 in the COMMAND line and press Enter. This
automatically transfers you to the Source Listing screen (2.L) and displays the
pseudo-listing created. This is shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2. Source Listing Screen with CWDEMCB2 Pseudo-Listing

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000005 00000BE6 58A0 D12C L 10,X'12C'(0,13)
000006 00000BEA 5890 C030 L 9,X'030'(0,12)
000007 00000BEE 5880 D134 L 8,X'134'(0,13)
000008 00000BF2 5870 D13C L 7,X'13C'(0,13)
000009 00000BF6 5860 D138 L 6,X'138'(0,13)
000010 00000BFA 5820 1000 L 2,X'000'(0,1)
000011 00000BFE 4120 2000 LA 2,X'000'(0,2)
000012 00000C02 5020 D134 ST 2,X'134'(0,13)
000013 00000C06 1882 LR 8,2
000014 00000C08 5820 1004 L 2,X'004'(0,1)
000015 00000C0C 4120 2000 LA 2,X'000'(0,2)
000016 00000C10 5020 D138 ST 2,X'138'(0,13)
000017 00000C14 1862 LR 6,2
000018 00000C16 D203 D0EC 9010 MVC X'0EC'(4,13),X'010'(9)
000019 00000C1C 9180 D1AC TM X'1AC'(13),X'80'
000020 00000C20 58B0 C034 L 11,X'034'(0,12)
000021 00000C24 4780 B3BE BZ X'3BE'(0,11)
000022 00000C28 5820 D05C L 2,X'05C'(0,13)
000023 00000C2C 58F0 21CC L 15,X'1CC'(0,2)
000024 00000C30 4110 97A0 LA 1,X'7A0'(0,9)
4. Type SET KEEPS OFF and press Enter. When performing sourceless debugging with a
pseudo-listing, no variable names are generated, so keeps by variable name cannot be
set. The SET KEEPS OFF command closes the keep window portion of the source
listing screen while in stop/abend state and displays more source lines.
6. On a blank CICS screen, type XCB2 or your transaction ID and press Enter. This
displays the Demonstration Transaction screen shown in Figure 4-3.
XCB2 _____ - ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER


7. To cause an ASRA abend in CWDEMCB2, type 00001 and press Enter.

When you used the PSEUDOSOURCE command for CWDEMCB2, it created a pseudo-
listing that appears to Xpediter/CICS just like a program that was processed with the
Assembler Language Processor. In this case, the Source Listing screen is displayed as
shown in Figure 4-4. You can see the resulting abend was an ASRA, a data exception
that occurred at statement 200 in the pseudo-listing. You can see the ASRA occurred
on a multiply decimal (MP) instruction.
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SOURCE LISTING (2.L) ----------------C123

000195 00000EEC 4770 B70A BNE X'70A'(0,11)
000196 00000EF0 F242 D1C0 A1A4 PACK X'1C0'(5,13),X'1A4'(3,10)
000197 00000EF6 960F D1C4 OI X'1C4'(13),X'0F'
000198 00000EFA F224 D1C8 A183 PACK X'1C8'(3,13),X'183'(5,10)
000199 00000F00 960F D1CA OI X'1CA'(13),X'0F'
=====> 00000F04 FC42 D1C0 D1C8 MP X'1C0'(5,13),X'1C8'(3,13)
000201 00000F0A F363 A038 D1C1 UNPK X'038'(7,10),X'1C1'(4,13)
000202 00000F10 96F0 A03E OI X'03E'(10),X'F0'
000203 00000F14 F266 D1C0 A038 PACK X'1C0'(7,13),X'038'(7,10)
000204 00000F1A 960F D1C6 OI X'1C6'(13),X'0F'
000205 00000F1E F223 D1C8 A192 PACK X'1C8'(3,13),X'192'(4,10)
000206 00000F24 960F D1CA OI X'1CA'(13),X'0F'
000207 00000F28 FC62 D1C0 D1C8 MP X'1C0'(7,13),X'1C8'(3,13)
000208 00000F2E 920F D1C6 MVI X'1C6'(13),X'0F'
000209 00000F32 F143 D1C2 D1C2 MVO X'1C2'(5,13),X'1C2'(4,13)
000210 00000F38 F363 A040 D1C3 UNPK X'040'(7,10),X'1C3'(4,13)
000211 00000F3E F236 D1C0 A196 PACK X'1C0'(4,13),X'196'(7,10)
000212 00000F44 F236 D1C8 A038 PACK X'1C8'(4,13),X'038'(7,10)
000213 00000F4A 960F D1CB OI X'1CB'(13),X'0F'
000214 00000F4E FA33 D1C0 D1C8 AP X'1C0'(4,13),X'1C8'(4,13)
Since an ASRA took place on an MP instruction, there is a good chance that one or
both of the multipliers contain invalid packed data. To test this theory, you can view
the data. First, look at the instruction MP X'1C0'(5,13),X'1C8'(3,13). Since an MP
instruction utilizes an IBM SS format, you can determine the first operand is 5 bytes
long and located at X'1C0' off register 13. The second operand is 3 bytes long and
located at X'1C8' off register 13. The next step is to find out where the data fields
being multiplied originated.
Notice the interrupt offset is X'F04'. In order to determine the statement associated
with the abend, we need to refer to the hardcopy of the compiler listing (Figure 4-5).
In our example, the LIST compiler option was used, so we need to refer to the
Generated Assembler Listing section of the listing. Look for the closest offset that is
less than the interrupt offset (X'F04').
In our example, statement 423 contains a COMPUTE statement at offset X'EF0'. The
next statement, also a COMPUTE statement, is at offset X'F14'. Therefore the
statement that failed is at offset X'EF0', or COBOL compiler statement 423. Also
notice that statement 423 does not multiply WA-HOURS or WA-RATE directly, but
uses the PACK instruction to convert them from NUMERIC-ZONED format to
decimal packed format. It is important to know this, as changing the value of these
fields and attempting to resume at the MP will fail. Note the actual offset of the first
instruction in statement 423 is X'EF0'. It will become important later in this example.
Figure 4-5. Sample Assembler Listing from COBOL Compiler
000423 COMPUTE
000EF0 F242 D1C0 A1A4 PACK 448(5,13),420(3,10) TS2=0 WA-HOURS
000EF6 960F D1C4 OI 452(13),X'0F' TS2=4
000EFA F224 D1C8 A183 PACK 456(3,13),387(5,10) TS2=8 WA-RATE
000F00 960F D1CA OI 458(13),X'0F' TS2=10
000F04 FC42 D1C0 D1C8 MP 448(5,13),456(3,13) TS2=0 TS2=8
000F0A F363 A038 D1C1 UNPK 56(7,10),449(4,13) CURR-PAY TS2=1
000F10 96F0 A03E OI 62(10),X'F0' CURR-PAY+6
000424 COMPUTE
000F14 F266 D1C0 A038 PACK 448(7,13),56(7,10) TS2=0 CURR-PAY
000F1A 960F D1C6 OI 454(13),X'0F' TS2=6
000F1E F223 D1C8 A192 PACK 456(3,13),402(4,10) TS2=8 WA-TAX-RAT
000F24 960F D1CA OI 458(13),X'0F' TS2=10
000F28 FC62 D1C0 D1C8 MP 448(7,13),456(3,13) TS2=0 TS2=8
000F2E 920F D1C6 MVI 454(13),X'0F' TS2=6
000F32 F143 D1C2 D1C2 MVO 450(5,13),450(4,13) TS2=2 TS2=2
000F38 F363 A040 D1C3 UNPK 64(7,10),451(4,13) CURR-TAXES TS2=3
If you look for statement 423 in the Procedure Division of your listing (Figure 4-6),
youll notice the program is trying to multiply WA-HOURS by WA-RATE. One or both
of these fields contains invalid data that caused the exception.
Figure 4-6. Procedure Division from Compiler Listing
000422 IF WA-TYPE EQUAL 'N' OR 'I' OR 'S' 69
000423 1 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE 12 85 76
000424 1 COMPUTE CURR-TAXES EQUAL CURR-PAY * WA-TAX-RAT 13 12 82
000425 1 ADD CURR-PAY TO WA-YTD-GRS 12 83
000426 1 ADD CURR-TAXES TO WA-YTD-TAX. 13 84
000427
Modifying Storage
Next, you will apply the values from the listing to view and modify the data in storage.
Since for all intents and purposes, Xpediter/CICS believes we are debugging an Assembler
program, we can find offsets by examining the instruction where the abend occurred. We
can see operand 1 is at offset X'1C0' off of register 13 and has a length of 5. Operand 2 is
at offset X'1C8' off of register 13 and has a length of 3. However, we know from our
previous discussion that these offsets reflect the temporary areas used by the compiler. In
order to verify where the variables reside, we can reference our compiled listing.
To find the offsets in working storage, refer to your hardcopy listing. Figure 4-7 illustrates
an example of where the values for WA-HOURS and WA-RATE reside. Notice the offset
into working storage for WA-HOURS is X'1A4'. The offset into working storage for WA-
RATE is X'183'.
Figure 4-7. Data Division from Compiler Listing
000068 01 WORK-AREA. BLW=0000+158 0CL105

000069 05 WA-TYPE PIC X. BLW=0000+158,0000000 1C
000070 05 WA-NAME PIC X(15). BLW=0000+159,0000001 15C
000071 05 WA-ADDRESS. BLW=0000+168,0000010 0CL27
000072 10 WA-STREET PIC X(12). BLW=0000+168,0000010 12C
000073 10 WA-CITY PIC X(8). BLW=0000+174,000001C 8C
000074 10 WA-STATE PIC XX. BLW=0000+17C,0000024 2C
000075 10 WA-ZIP PIC X(5). BLW=0000+17E,0000026 5C
000076 05 WA-RATE PIC 9(3)V99. BLW=0000+183,000002B 5C
000077 05 WA-DATE-EFF. BLW=0000+188,0000030 0CL6
000078 10 WA-DTEFF-MM PIC XX. BLW=0000+188,0000030 2C
000079 10 WA-DTEFF-DD PIC XX. BLW=0000+18A,0000032 2C
000080 10 WA-DTEFF-YY PIC XX. BLW=0000+18C,0000034 2C
000081 05 WA-LST-PCT PIC 9(3)V9. BLW=0000+18E,0000036 4C
000082 05 WA-TAX-RAT PIC 9(3)V9. BLW=0000+192,000003A 4C
000083 05 WA-YTD-GRS PIC S9(5)V99. BLW=0000+196,000003E 7C
000084 05 WA-YTD-TAX PIC S9(5)V99. BLW=0000+19D,0000045 7C
000085 05 WA-HOURS PIC 999. BLW=0000+1A4,000004C 3C
000086 05 WA-MSG PIC X(26). BLW=0000+1A7,000004F 26C
1. Type =2.2 in the COMMAND field and press Enter, or press PF14, to transfer to the
Memory Display screen (2.2) as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8. Viewing Program Storage on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

TABLE/AREA: PGM TABLE ENTRY ID: ________
ADDRESS: 389F4158 HEX OFFSET: _______________________________
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ ERDSA

CCSID TYPE: EBCDIC
00000000 000 47F0F070 23C3E6C4 C5D4C3C2 F240C3F2 * 00.CWDEMCB2 C2 * 389F4158
00000010 010 40F14BF4 4BF040F0 F661F0F9 61F0F540 * 1.4.0 06/09/05 * 389F4168
00000020 020 F1F14BF2 F34BF0F1 389F41AC 60E86C0C * 11.23.01. -Y%. * 389F4178
00000030 030 00000000 50800308 00000000 09000000 * ....&.......... * 389F4188
00000040 040 00880400 000000F4 00000094 00000000 * .h.....4...m.... * 389F4198
00000050 050 40404040 389F4158 389F41D8 389F5B48 * . . Q.$ * 389F41A8
00000060 060 389F415D 389F4158 389F4D3E 389F5E68 * . ). .(..; * 389F41B8
00000070 070 90ECD00C 5810F028 98EFF068 07FF0000 * }..0.q0.... * 389F41C8
00000080 080 00004040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * .. * 389F41D8
00000090 090 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * * 389F41E8
000000A0 0A0 40F0F0F0 F0F0F0F0 0000000C F0F0C040 * 0000000....00{ * 389F41F8
000000B0 0B0 389F4214 389F49D0 389F59D0 389F4118 * ...}.}. . * 389F4208
000000C0 0C0 389F5DA0 389F4D3E FFFFFFFF 00000001 * .).(......... * 389F4218
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00100032 001E1140 00080005 * ........... .... * 389F4228
000000E0 0E0 0320041D 0050E3C8 D6D440E3 C8E4D4C2 * .....&THOM THUMB * 389F4238
000000F0 0F0 F540E3C5 D3C5C7D9 C1D7C840 D9C4C4C5 * 5 TELEGRAPH RDDE * 389F4248
The Memory Display screen (2.2) shows a hexadecimal dump of your test program.
Any instruction or data in your program is available from here. Simply type the
displacement you wish to see in the HEX (or ADD) OFFSET fields.
2. To display the contents of your first multiplier (WA-RATE), use Xpediter/CICS to
display the programs working storage by pressing PF16 (WS), then type 183 in the
OFFSET field and press Enter. The display is positioned at the first data item as shown
in Figure 4-9.
Field WA-RATE is 5 bytes long and contains 00950. This is a valid number and is not
the cause of the data exception.
Figure 4-9. WA-RATE Data Field on the Working Storage Screen (2.3)


OFFSET: _____
00183 000 F0F0F9F5 F0F0F1F0 F1F8F4F0 F1F1F0F0 * 0095001018401100 * 3800A043
00193 010 F2F0F0F1 F5F0F0F0 F0C0F0F3 F0F0F0F0 * 200150000{030000 * 3800A053
001A3 020 C05B5B5B 40404040 40404040 40404040 * {$$$ * 3800A063
001B3 030 40404040 40404040 40404040 40400000 * .. * 3800A073
001C3 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A083
001D3 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A093
001E3 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0A3
001F3 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0B3
00203 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0C3
00213 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0D3
00223 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0E3
00233 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0F3
00243 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A103
00253 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A113
00263 0E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A123
00273 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A133
00283 100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A143
00293 110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A153
002A3 120 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A163
3. Press PF16 (WS) to refresh the screen, then display the contents of the second data
item (WA-HOURS) by typing 1A4 in the OFFSET field and pressing Enter. The screen
is positioned at the second data item as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10. WA-HOURS Data Field on the Working Storage Screen (2.3)


OFFSET: _____
001A4 000 5B5B5B40 40404040 40404040 40404040 * $$$ * 3800A064
001B4 010 40404040 40404040 40404040 40000000 * ... * 3800A074
001C4 020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A084
001D4 030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A094
001E4 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0A4
001F4 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0B4
00204 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0C4
00214 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0D4
00224 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0E4
00234 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0F4
00244 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A104
00254 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A114
00264 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A124
00274 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A134
00284 0E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A144
00294 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A154
002A4 100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A164
002B4 110 00000000 1140401D F0E7C3C2 F21140C5 * ..... .0XCB2. E * 3800A174
002C4 120 1DD1136D 1140401D F0404B1D F01140C5 * .J._. .0 ..0. E * 3800A184
This time, the displayed field contains bad data. The three-byte field contains
5B5B5B, otherwise known as $$$. This error caused the ASRA.
4. Position the cursor on the bad data ($$$).
5. Replace the bad data by typing a valid number, such as 040, over the data.
6. Press Enter to process the change. The field contains the valid data shown in Figure
4-11.


OFFSET: _____
001A4 000 F0F4F040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * 040 * 3800A064
001B4 010 40404040 40404040 40404040 40000000 * ... * 3800A074
001C4 020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A084
001D4 030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A094
001E4 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0A4
001F4 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0B4
00204 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0C4
00214 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0D4
00224 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0E4
00234 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A0F4
00244 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A104
00254 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A114
00264 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A124
00274 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A134
00284 0E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A144
00294 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A154
002A4 100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3800A164
002B4 110 00000000 1140401D F0E7C3C2 F21140C5 * ..... .0XCB2. E * 3800A174
002C4 120 1DD1136D 1140401D F0404B1D F01140C5 * .J._. .0 ..0. E * 3800A184
Now that you have corrected the data causing the error, you can continue with the
test.
7. Press PF6, or type =2.L and press Enter, to return to the Source Listing screen.
8. To continue your test, re-execute the statement in error. Remember earlier we found
that statement 423 really begins with the instruction at offset x'EF0'.
We can see that offset x'EF0' is associated with the instruction at line 196. In order to
correctly re-execute the statement, enter GOTO 196 (or GOTO +EF0) in the
COMMAND line and press Enter. This relocates the execution pointer to this line as
shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12. Source Listing Screen (2.L) after Using GOTO 196 Command

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****************** GOTO STATEMENT 00196. ******************
------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.196 ->
000195 00000EEC 4770 B70A BNE X'70A'(0,11)
=====> 00000EF0 F242 D1C0 A1A4 PACK X'1C0'(5,13),X'1A4'(3,10)
000197 00000EF6 960F D1C4 OI X'1C4'(13),X'0F'
000198 00000EFA F224 D1C8 A183 PACK X'1C8'(3,13),X'183'(5,10)
000199 00000F00 960F D1CA OI X'1CA'(13),X'0F'
000200 00000F04 FC42 D1C0 D1C8 MP X'1C0'(5,13),X'1C8'(3,13)
000201 00000F0A F363 A038 D1C1 UNPK X'038'(7,10),X'1C1'(4,13)
000202 00000F10 96F0 A03E OI X'03E'(10),X'F0'
000203 00000F14 F266 D1C0 A038 PACK X'1C0'(7,13),X'038'(7,10)
000204 00000F1A 960F D1C6 OI X'1C6'(13),X'0F'
000205 00000F1E F223 D1C8 A192 PACK X'1C8'(3,13),X'192'(4,10)
000206 00000F24 960F D1CA OI X'1CA'(13),X'0F'
000207 00000F28 FC62 D1C0 D1C8 MP X'1C0'(7,13),X'1C8'(3,13)
000208 00000F2E 920F D1C6 MVI X'1C6'(13),X'0F'
000209 00000F32 F143 D1C2 D1C2 MVO X'1C2'(5,13),X'1C2'(4,13)
000210 00000F38 F363 A040 D1C3 UNPK X'040'(7,10),X'1C3'(4,13)
000211 00000F3E F236 D1C0 A196 PACK X'1C0'(4,13),X'196'(7,10)
000212 00000F44 F236 D1C8 A038 PACK X'1C8'(4,13),X'038'(7,10)
000213 00000F4A 960F D1CB OI X'1CB'(13),X'0F'
000214 00000F4E FA33 D1C0 D1C8 AP X'1C0'(4,13),X'1C8'(4,13)
9. Press PF9 several times to step through the MP instruction on line 200. This time, the
transaction should not abend.
10. Type GO in the COMMAND field and press Enter.
The program finishes without further abends, concluding our exercise in sourceless
debugging (Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13. Transaction Complete on the Demonstration Transaction Screen


HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 9.50
GROSS PAY: 380.00

11. Change the listing name back to CWDEMCB2 as described in Preparing for
Sourceless Debugging on page 4-2. This will reset the listing name so you can again
access the COBOL source for this program.
Line Mode
Sourceless Debugging without Breakpoints
1. On a blank screen, type XPED and press Enter. This activates Xpediter/CICS for your
terminal, turns on the abend trap option, and displays the Primary Menu as shown
in Figure 4-14.

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:





Xpediter/CICS is now turned ON and ready to intercept any abends associated with
your terminal and programs.
2. To continue with this section, you must first disable any Xpediter/CICS source listing
for CWDEMCB2. Type =2.6.1 in the COMMAND field and CWDEMCB2 in the
MODULE field, then press Enter to go to the List of CSECTS screen (2.6.1). Overtype
CWDEMCB2 in the LISTING column with XXDEMCB2 and press Enter to disable the
source listing. Be sure to change the name back to CWDEMCB2 when you have
completed the procedures in this chapter, or simply end your Xpediter session.
4. On a blank CICS screen, type XCB2 or your transaction ID and press Enter. This
displays the Demonstration Transaction screen shown in Figure 4-15.


5. To cause an ASRA abend in CWDEMCB2, type 00001 and press Enter.

When no source is available for the abending program, Xpediter/CICS displays the
Assembler Break/Abend screen (2.20) as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16. Assembler Break/Abend Screen (2.20)
----------------- XPEDITER/CICS - ASSEMBLER BREAK/ABEND (2.20) ------------C123

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 +++++++++++ NO SOURCE AVAILABLE. USE HELP KEY ++++++++++++
CAUSE: DATA EXCEPTION ABEND CODE: ASRA
APPLID: ACMEC123 USERID: MYUSRID TERM: A011 NETNAME: ACMA011 TRAN: XCB2
INTERRUPT OFFSET: 001134 ADDRESS: BBB041DC PSW: 079D1000 BBB041E2 00060007
RESUME OFFSET: 001134 ADDRESS: BBB041DC LAST CICS COMMAND:

INSTRUCTION: FC42 D0F0 D0F8 MP X'0F0'(5,13),X'0F8'(3,13)
REGISTERS:

R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
3AE056CC 00207448 00000000 3BB03EA2 000CE338 00226EB0 00000000 002000D0

R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15
3AE09608 3AE05588 3BB031E0 3BB03A28 3BB031A4 00207358 BBB04106 00000000
The program name is displayed at the top of the screen. Below the program name is
the cause of the abend, which is a data exception, and the abend code, which is
ASRA. Statistical information such as the current offset of the interrupted
instruction, its physical address, and the program status word (PSW) in use are
displayed. Notice that Xpediter/CICS displays the resume offset and address, should
you wish to continue processing.
Next we see the current instruction, complete with its operation code and operands.
Xpediter/CICS also shows that disassembled instruction to the right. From this, you
see the ASRA occurred on a multiply decimal (MP) instruction.
Toward the bottom of the screen, all 16 of the current general purpose registers are
displayed.
Since an ASRA took place on an MP instruction, there is a good chance that one or
both of the multipliers contain invalid packed data. To test this theory, you can view
the data. First, look at the instruction MP X'0F0'(5,13),X'0F8'(3,13). Since an MP
instruction utilizes an IBM SS format, you can determine the first operand is 5 bytes
long and is located x'0F0' off register 13. The second operand is 3 bytes in length,
located x'0F8' off register 13. The next step is to find out where the data fields being
multiplied originated.
Notice that the interrupt offset is x'1134'. Refer to your hardcopy of the condensed
listing to locate the statement containing offset x'1134' (Figure 4-17). Look for the
closest offset that is less than the interrupt offset.
In our example, statement 359 contains a COMPUTE statement at offset x'1120'. The
next statement, also a COMPUTE statement, is at offset x'1144'. Therefore, the
statement that failed is at offset x'1120'.
If you look for statement 359 in the Procedure Division of your listing, youll notice
that the program is trying to multiply WA-HOURS by WA-RATE. One or both of these
fields contains invalid data that caused the exception.
Figure 4-17. Condensed Procedure Division
------ 000339 001088 MOVE 000340 00108E GO

------ 000342 00109C GO 000343 0010A0 IF
------ 000345 0010AE IF 000346 0010B8 GO
------ 000348 0010C6 GO 000349 0010CE IF
------ 000351 0010E0 IF 000352 0010EA MOVE
------ 000354 0010F4 MOVE 000355 001104 GO
------ 000359 001120 COMPUTE 000360 001144 COMPUTE
------ 000362 001190 ADD 000364 0011B2 IF
------ 000367 0011C2 IF 000368 0011CC MOVE
------ 000372 0011DA MOVE 000373 0011DE IF
------ 000375 001202 IF 000376 001216 MOVE
------ 000378 001230 MOVE 000379 001236 IF
------ 000383 00124C IF 000384 001264 MOVE
------ 000390 0012A0 MOVE 000393 0012A6 MOVE
Modifying Storage
Next, you will apply the values from the listing to view and modify the data in storage.
1. To find the offsets in working storage, refer to your hardcopy listing. Figure 4-18
illustrates an example of the values for WA-HOURS and WA-RATE. Notice the offset
into working storage for WA-HOURS is x'1DC' and the offset into working storage for
WA-RATE is x'1BB'.
Figure 4-18. Data Division Map
75 3 WA-STATE. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1B4 0 000 024 DS 2C Display

76 3 WA-ZIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1B6 0 000 026 DS 5C Display
77 2 WA-RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1BB 0 000 02B DS 5C Disp-Num
78 2 WA-DATE-EFF . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1C0 0 000 030 DS 0CL6 Group
79 3 WA-DTEFF-MM . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1C0 0 000 030 DS 2C Display
80 3 WA-DTEFF-DD . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1C2 0 000 032 DS 2C Display
81 3 WA-DTEFF-YY . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1C4 0 000 034 DS 2C Display
82 2 WA-LST-PCT. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1C6 0 000 036 DS 4C Disp-Num
83 2 WA-TAX-RAT. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1CA 0 000 03A DS 4C Disp-Num
84 2 WA-YTD-GRS. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1CE 0 000 03E DS 7C Disp-Num
85 2 WA-YTD-TAX. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1D5 0 000 045 DS 7C Disp-Num
86 2 WA-HOURS. . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1DC 0 000 04C DS 3C Disp-Num
87 2 WA-MSG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 1DF 0 000 04F DS 26C Display
89 1 VSAM-EMP-RECORD . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 200 DS 0CL80 Group
90 2 EMP-NUM-KEY . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 200 0 000 000 DS 5C Display
91 2 EMP-NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 205 0 000 005 DS 15C Display
92 2 EMP-HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 214 0 000 014 DS 3C Disp-Num
93 2 EMP-TOTPAY. . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 217 0 000 017 DS 7C Disp-Num
94 2 FILLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 21E 0 000 01E DS 50C Display
96 1 EMP-RECORD-TABLE. . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 250 DS 0CL150 Group
97 2 EMP-RECORD-TBL. . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 250 0 000 000 DS 0CL30 Group
98 3 EMP-NUM-KEY-TBL . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 250 0 000 000 DS 5C Display
99 3 EMP-NAME-TBL. . . . . . . . . . BLW=00000 255 0 000 005 DS 15C Display
2. Type =2.2 in the COMMAND field and press Enter, or press PF14, to transfer to the
Memory Display screen (2.2) as shown in Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-19. Viewing Program Storage on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

TABLE/AREA: PGM TABLE ENTRY ID: ________
ADDRESS: 3BB030A8 HEX OFFSET: _______________________________
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ ERDSA

CCSID TYPE: EBCDIC
00000000 000 47F0F028 00C3C5C5 00000130 00000014 * .00..CEE........ * 3BB030A8
00000010 010 47F0F001 98CEAC00 3BB0315E 00000000 * .00.Q......;.... * 3BB030B8
00000020 020 00000000 00000000 90ECD00C 4110F038 * ..........}...0. * 3BB030C8
00000030 030 98EFF04C 07FF0000 3BB030A8 00000000 * Q.0<.......Y.... * 3BB030D8
00000040 040 3BB04E60 3BB03156 3BB030A8 3BB03DD6 * ..+-.......Y...O * 3BB030E8
00000050 050 3BB05248 3BB03172 00104001 00000008 * .......... ..... * 3BB030F8
00000060 060 C3E6C4C5 D4C3C2F2 F2F0F0F3 F0F5F2F8 * CWDEMCB220030528 * 3BB03108
00000070 070 F1F1F1F1 F2F9F0F3 F0F2F0F0 04740000 * 111129030200.... * 3BB03118
00000080 080 0000076C 60E86C4C 20000000 50800708 * ...%-Y%<....&... * 3BB03128
00000090 090 00000000 09000000 80888000 000000DF * .........H...... * 3BB03138
000000A0 0A0 000000A7 00808000 40404040 0008C3E6 * ...X.... ..CW * 3BB03148
000000B0 0B0 C4C5D4C3 C2F20500 00013BB0 51C80000 * DEMCB2.......H.. * 3BB03158
000000C0 0C0 0000FFFF FFB23BB0 30A83BB0 30E00000 * .........Y...\.. * 3BB03168
000000D0 0D0 00080000 00063BB0 30E03BB0 51C83BB0 * .........\...H.. * 3BB03178
000000E0 0E0 51A80000 00050000 00000000 00000000 * .Y.............. * 3BB03188
000000F0 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 * ................ * 3BB03198
The Memory Display screen (2.2) shows a hexadecimal dump of your test program.
Any instruction or data in your program is available from here. Simply type the
displacement you wish to see in the HEX (or ADD) OFFSET field.
3. To display the contents of your first multiplier (WA-RATE), first use Xpediter/CICS to
display the programs working storage by pressing PF16 (WS), then type 1BB in the
OFFSET field and press Enter. The display will be positioned at the first data item as
Field WA-RATE is five bytes long and contains 00950. This is a valid number and is
not the cause of the data exception.
Figure 4-20. WA-RATE Data Field on the Working Storage Screen (2.3)


OFFSET: _____
001BB 000 F0F0F9F5 F0F0F1F0 F1F8F4F0 F1F1F0F0 * 0095001018401100 * 3AE097C3
001CB 010 F2F0F0F1 F5F0F0F0 F0C0F0F3 F0F0F0F0 * 200150000{030000 * 3AE097D3
001DB 020 C05B5B5B 40404040 40404040 40404040 * {$$$ * 3AE097E3
001EB 030 40404040 40404040 40404040 40400000 * .. * 3AE097F3
001FB 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09803
0020B 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09813
0021B 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09823
0022B 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09833
0023B 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09843
0024B 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09853
0025B 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09863
0026B 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09873
0027B 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09883
0028B 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09893
0029B 0E0 00000000 00114040 1DF0E7C3 C2F21140 * ...... .0XCB2. * 3AE098A3
002AB 0F0 C51DD113 6D6D6D6D 6D11404B 1DF06040 * E.J._____. ..0- * 3AE098B3
002BB 100 C5D5E3C5 D940C5D4 D7D3D6E8 C5C540D5 * ENTER EMPLOYEE N * 3AE098C3
002CB 110 E4D4C2C5 D9404040 40404040 40404040 * UMBER * 3AE098D3
002DB 120 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * * 3AE098E3
4. Press PF16 (WS) to refresh the screen. Then display the contents of the second data
item (WA-HOURS) by typing 1DC in the OFFSET field and pressing Enter. The screen
is positioned at the second data item as shown in Figure 4-21.


OFFSET: _____
001DC 000 5B5B5B40 40404040 40404040 40404040 * $$$ * 3AE097E4
001EC 010 40404040 40404040 40404040 40000000 * ... * 3AE097F4
001FC 020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09804
0020C 030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09814
0021C 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09824
0022C 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09834
0023C 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09844
0024C 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09854
0025C 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09864
0026C 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09874
0027C 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09884
0028C 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09894
0029C 0C0 00000000 1140401D F0E7C3C2 F21140C5 * ..... .0XCB2. E * 3AE098A4
002AC 0D0 1DD1136D 6D6D6D6D 11404B1D F06040C5 * .J._____. ..0- E * 3AE098B4
002BC 0E0 D5E3C5D9 40C5D4D7 D3D6E8C5 C540D5E4 * NTER EMPLOYEE NU * 3AE098C4
002CC 0F0 D4C2C5D9 40404040 40404040 40404040 * MBER * 3AE098D4
002DC 100 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * * 3AE098E4
002EC 110 40404040 40404040 40404040 40C3F0F9 * C09 * 3AE098F4
002FC 120 F3404040 1140401D F0404040 401140C5 * 3 . .0 . E * 3AE09904
This time, the displayed field contains bad data. The three-byte field contains
5B5B5B, otherwise known as $$$. This error caused the ASRA.
5. Position the cursor on the bad data ($$$).
6. Replace the bad data by typing a valid number, such as 040, over the data.
7. Press Enter to process the change. The field contains valid data shown in Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22. Modifying Data on the Working Storage Screen (2.3)


OFFSET: _____
001DC 000 F0F4F040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * 040 * 3AE097E4
001EC 010 40404040 40404040 40404040 40000000 * ... * 3AE097F4
001FC 020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09804
0020C 030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09814
0021C 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09824
0022C 050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09834
0023C 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09844
0024C 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09854
0025C 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09864
0026C 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09874
0027C 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09884
0028C 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3AE09894
0029C 0C0 00000000 1140401D F0E7C3C2 F21140C5 * ..... .0XCB2. E * 3AE098A4
002AC 0D0 1DD1136D 6D6D6D6D 11404B1D F06040C5 * .J._____. ..0- E * 3AE098B4
002BC 0E0 D5E3C5D9 40C5D4D7 D3D6E8C5 C540D5E4 * NTER EMPLOYEE NU * 3AE098C4
002CC 0F0 D4C2C5D9 40404040 40404040 40404040 * MBER * 3AE098D4
002DC 100 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * * 3AE098E4
002EC 110 40404040 40404040 40404040 40C3F0F9 * C09 * 3AE098F4
002FC 120 F3404040 1140401D F0404040 401140C5 * 3 . .0 . E * 3AE09904
Now that you have corrected the data causing the error, you can continue with the
test.
8. Press PF6, or type =2.20 and press Enter, to return to the Assembler Break/Abend
screen (2.20) shown in Figure 4-16 on page 4-10.
9. Change the resume offset to position to the beginning of the COMPUTE statement
by typing 1120 in the RESUME OFFSET field.
10. To continue your test, re-execute the COMPUTE statement by pressing PF12 or by
typing GO in the COMMAND field and pressing Enter. This time, the transaction
should not abend.
The program finishes without further abends, concluding our exercise in sourceless
debugging (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23. Transaction Complete on the Demonstration Transaction Screen


HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 9.50
GROSS PAY: 380.00

11. Change the listing name back to CWDEMCB2 as described in Preparing for
Sourceless Debugging on page 4-2. This will reset the listing name so you can again
access the COBOL source for this program.
5-1
Chapter 5.
Debugging Subroutines Chap 5
This chapter discusses how to test load modules that consist of multiple programs or
control sections (CSECTs). The sections of the chapter show how to access source code
and set breakpoints in calling and called programs, execute a program with multiple
CSECTs, and return to the calling program. It also provides ways to select and exclude
CSECTs.
Many modules consist of individual source members that are compiled or assembled
separately, then link edited together to create a load module. Xpediter/CICS lets you
debug these CSECTs at the source level, even when the CSECT is not defined to CICS as a
program resource.
The automatic CSECT support facility provides screens that list the CSECTs associated
with each program. You choose the program for which you need to see the source.
Facilities are also available so that IBM or vendor-supplied CSECTs may be excluded from
automatic CSECT processing.
In this chapter, you will set a breakpoint in the calling program CWDEMCB2, then access
the source code for CWCDSUBA and set a breakpoint there. CWCDSUBA is a subroutine
linked into CWDEMCB2 that does not have an entry in the program resources to define it
to CICS. After setting the breakpoint, you will execute the transaction that runs
CWDEMCB2 and step through the source in CWCDSUBA.
Note: If you cannot obtain a source listing for CWCDSUBA, your site may not be
licensed for Assembler support. When the NO SOURCE AVAILABLE message
appears, press PF1 for source information. If your site is not licensed for
Assembler support, you can still read through this chapter to understand the
concepts presented.
The chapter also includes details on how Xpediter steps through selected and unselected
CSECTs and Language Environment user condition handlers.

Note: DLL modules are supported at the CSECT level on the 2.6.1 screen described later
in this chapter. DLL modules are also supported at the function level via the 2.6.F
screen. If you are debugging a DLL module containing multiple functions, refer
to the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual for further details.
Setting Breakpoints in a Calling Program

1. Type XPED CWDEMCB2 on a blank CICS screen. Press Enter to display source code
for CWDEMCB2 on the Source Listing screen (2.L) as shown in Figure 5-1.
2. If your Source Listing screen (2.L) is shifted right compared with Figure 5-1, type SET
JUST ON in the COMMAND field and press Enter.

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000300 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
000304 END-EXEC.
000307 NOHANDLE
000308 END-EXEC.
000309
000312 ELSE
000314
000317 MOVE '_____' TO PAYEMP1.
3. Type F CWCDSUBA in the COMMAND field. Press Enter to find the call to
CWCDSUBA.
4. Type the B (Before) line command on the statement number for the call, which is
statement 523 in this example, and press Enter. The B flag on the Source Listing
screen (2.L) shows that the breakpoint has been set (Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2. Breakpoint Set on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000522 ** CALL THE ASSEMBLER SUBROUTINE TO CALCULATE TOTAL PAY.....
000523 B CALL 'CWCDSUBA' USING EMP-RECORD-LIST CWCDWRKA.
000524
000525 ** SEND SCREEN AND RETURN CONTROL TO CICS.....
000526 MOVE EMP-NUM-LIST TO EMPNUMB.
000527 MOVE 'JOHN SMITH' TO EMPNAME.
000528 MOVE EMP-HOURS-LIST TO HRSWRKD.
000529 MOVE EMP-RATE-LIST TO HRLYRAT.
000530 MOVE EMP-TOTPAY-LIST TO GROSPAY.
000531 MOVE '*** TRANSACTION COMPLETE ***' TO PAYMSG.
000532 MOVE WS-SYSID TO PAYSID2.
000533 EXEC CICS SEND
000534 FROM (PAYMAP2)
000535 LENGTH (PAYMAP2-LEN)
000536 ERASE
000537 END-EXEC.
000538 EXEC CICS RETURN END-EXEC.
000539
000540 1000-PROCESS-00333-SELECTION.
000541 *****************************************************************
5. Type =2.6.1 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the List of CSECTs
screen (2.6.1) (Figure 5-3).
This screen shows all the CSECTs linked together to form the load module
CWDEMCB2. The SELECTED field indicates whether that CSECT has been selected
for debugging. CICS (DFH), COBOL (IGZ), and Language Environment (CEE)
modules are automatically excluded. The source for CWDEMCB2 displays
automatically; you do not need to select it.
Debugging Subroutines 5-3
Figure 5-3. List of CSECTs Screen (2.6.1)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - LIST OF CSECTS (2.6.1) ---------------C123


LINE COMMANDS: D (Deselect) S (Select) I (Intercept) V (View Source)
LOADED FROM LIBRARY: ACME.TEST2.LOAD
CMD CSECT LISTING SEL OFFSET LENGTH ADDRESS ERROR
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DFHELII EXCL 00000000 00000026 3BB03080
_ CWDEMCB2 CWDEMCB2 NO 00000028 00002020 3BB030A8
_ CWCDSUBA CWCDSUBA NO 00002048 000000C4 3BB050C8
CEESG005 EXCL 00002110 00000018 3BB05190
CEEBETBL EXCL 00002128 00000020 3BB051A8
CEESTART EXCL 00002148 00000080 3BB051C8
IGZCBSO EXCL 000021C8 000004E0 3BB05248
CEEARLU EXCL 000026A8 000000A8 3BB05728
CEEBPIRA EXCL 00002750 00000280 3BB057D0
CEECPYRT EXCL 000029D0 000000E8 3BB05A50
CEEBPUBT EXCL 00002AB8 00000070 3BB05B38
CEEBTRM EXCL 00002B28 000000A8 3BB05BA8
CEEBLLST EXCL 00002BD0 00000060 3BB05C50
CEEBINT EXCL 00002C30 00000008 3BB05CB0
**END**
6. Type S next to CWCDSUBA in the CMD field and press Enter.

7. Type CWCDSUBA in the CSECT field.
8. Type =2.L in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The Source Listing screen (2.L) is
displayed showing source for CWCDSUBA (Figure 5-4).
Figure 5-4. Source Listing Screen (2.L) Showing CWCDSUBA

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 CSECT: CWCDSUBA COMPILED: 25 OCT 2002 - 07.28
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000018 STM R14,R12,12(R13) SAVE CALLING PGM'S REGISTERS.
000019 LR R12,R15 ESTABLISH ADDRESSABILITY.
000020 USING CWCDSUBA,R12 REG 12 IS THE BASE REG.
000021 L R4,4(,R1) A(WORK AREA)
000022 USING CWCDWRK,R4
000023 XC 0(WRKLEN,R4),0(R4) CLEAR WORKAREA
000024 ST R13,SAVEAREA+4 SAVE CALLERS SAVEAREA ADDRESS
000025 LA R15,SAVEAREA GET ADDRESS OF THIS PGMS SAVEARE
000026 ST R15,8(R13) SAVE IT HERE
000027 LR R13,R15 R13 = THIS PGMS SAVEAREA
000029 L R2,0(,R1) LOAD ADDR OF CALLING PGM LIST.
000030 MVC LISTAREA(20),0(R2) MOVE CALLING PGM LIST TO LISTARE
000031 MVC LSTRATE,=C'00000' ZERO OUT LISTAREA RATE FIELD.
000032 MVC LSTTPAY,=C'0000000' ZERO OUT LISTAREA TOTAL PAY FLD.
000033 ZAP PAKTPAY,=P'+0' ZERO OUT TOTAL PAY PACKED FIELD.
000034 LA R6,EMPTBL LOAD ADDR OF EMPLOYEE TABLE.
000035 TBLLOOP CLC LSTNUM,0(R6) SEARCH FOR EMP NUM IN TABLE.
000036 BE CALCPAY FOUND IT, CALCULATE PAY.
000037 LA R6,8(,R6) GET NEXT EMP NUM IN TABLE.
9. Press PF8 to scroll down through the listing.

10. Type the B (Before) line command on the statement number for the instruction BR
R14 (statement 49 in this example) and press Enter. This sets a breakpoint at the
branch back to the main program (Figure 5-5).
You have set a breakpoint in the main program at the call to the subroutine and a
breakpoint in the subroutine just before the return to the main program. The
programs are ready to test.
Figure 5-5. Breakpoint Set on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000038 C R6,=A(EMPTBL+32) ARE WE AT THE LAST EMP IN TABLE?
000039 BNE TBLLOOP NO, REPEAT TABLE LOOP.
000040 CALCPAY MVC LSTRATE(3),5(R6) MOVE RATE TO LISTAREA.
000041 PACK PAKTPAY(5),LSTRATE MOVE RATE TO A PACKED FIELD.
000042 PACK PAKHOURS(2),LSTHOURS MOVE HOURS TO A PACKED FIELD.
000043 MP PAKTPAY,PAKHOURS MULTIPLY RATE * HOURS.
000044 UNPK LSTTPAY,PAKTPAY MOVE TOTAL PAY TO LISTAREA.
000045 OI LSTTPAY+6,X'F0' STRIP OFF SIGNED BYTE.
000046 MVC 0(20,R2),LISTAREA PASS DATA BACK TO CALLING PGM.
000047 L R13,SAVEAREA+4 LOAD ADDRESS OF PREVIOUS STACK.
000048 LM R14,R12,12(R13) RESTORE REGISTERS.
000049 B BR R14 GO BACK TO CALLING PROGRAM.
000050 LTORG
000051 =A(EMPTBL+32)
000052 =C'00000'
000053 =C'0000000'
000054 =P'+0'
000055 *
------
------ Active Usings: CWCDWRK(X'1000'),R4 CWCDSUBA(X'1000'),R12
Executing a Program Containing Multiple CSECTs

1. Press Clear to return to CICS and run the program.
2. Type XCB2 in the upper left corner of the screen and press Enter to display the
Demonstration Transaction screen (Figure 5-6).


3. Type 00005 in the field preceding ENTER EMPLOYEE NUMBER and press Enter. The
Source Listing screen (2.L) appears as shown in Figure 5-7.
Note that the program is stopped before the call to the subroutine.

01 EMP-RECORD-LIST GROUP 00050040
01 CWCDWRKA X(256) ........................
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.523 ->
=====> B CALL 'CWCDSUBA' USING EMP-RECORD-LIST CWCDWRKA.
000524
000526 MOVE EMP-NUM-LIST TO EMPNUMB.
4. Press PF9 (GO 1) to follow the logic into CWCDSUBA. The Source Listing screen (2.L)
is displayed for CWCDSUBA (Figure 5-8).
Figure 5-8. Source Listing Screen (2.L) for CWCDSUBA

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****** ASM-INST AT OFFSET 1A50 EXECUTED STEP=00001 *******

-------- DATA LABEL KEEPS -------- -- ATTRIBUTES -- ----+---10----+---20--->

------ ------------------------------------------------ Before CWCDSUBA.18 ->
000015 CWCDSUBA AMODE ANY
000016 CWCDSUBA RMODE ANY
000017 * STANDARD HOUSEKEEPING AND LINKAGE CONVENTIONS...
=====> STM R14,R12,12(R13) SAVE CALLING PGM'S REGISTERS.
000021 L R4,4(,R1) A(WORK AREA)
000025 LA R15,SAVEAREA GET ADDRESS OF THIS PGMS SAVEARE
5. Type GO 5 1 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. Watch closely while
Xpediter/CICS slow steps through CWCDSUBA (Figure 5-9). When five statements
have executed, Xpediter/CICS displays the message
****** ASM-INST AT OFFSET 0010 EXECUTED STEP=00005 *******

Figure 5-9. Executing GO 5 1 on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****** ASM-INST AT OFFSET 0010 EXECUTED STEP=00005 *******
SAVEAREA 18F 'X 00000000
REPEATS(18) 1
**END**

------ ------------------------------------------------ Before CWCDSUBA.25 ->
000015 CWCDSUBA AMODE ANY
000016 CWCDSUBA RMODE ANY
000017 * STANDARD HOUSEKEEPING AND LINKAGE CONVENTIONS...
000018 STM R14,R12,12(R13) SAVE CALLING PGM'S REGISTERS.
000021 L R4,4(,R1) A(WORK AREA)
=====> LA R15,SAVEAREA GET ADDRESS OF THIS PGMS SAVEARE
Returning to the Calling Program

1. Press PF12 (GO) to resume execution of the program. The Source Listing screen (2.L)
is displayed showing the breakpoint at the branch instruction back to the calling
program (Figure 5-10).

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 CSECT: CWCDSUBA COMPILED: 25 OCT 2002 - 07.28

------ ------------------------------------------------ Before CWCDSUBA.49 ->
000046 MVC 0(20,R2),LISTAREA PASS DATA BACK TO CALLING PGM.
000047 L R13,SAVEAREA+4 LOAD ADDRESS OF PREVIOUS STACK.
000048 LM R14,R12,12(R13) RESTORE REGISTERS.
=====> B BR R14 GO BACK TO CALLING PROGRAM.
000050 LTORG
000051 =A(EMPTBL+32)
000052 =C'00000'
000053 =C'0000000'
000054 =P'+0'
000055 *
------
------ Active Usings: CWCDWRK(X'1000'),R4 CWCDSUBA(X'1000'),R12
------ Loc Object Code Addr1 Addr2 Stmt Source Statement
000056 *
2. Press PF9 (GO 1) to step back to the calling program (Figure 5-11).

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ****** STATEMENT 000049 EXECUTED STEP=00001 *******
02 EMP-NUM-LIST X(5) 00050
03 EMPNUMB X(5) .....
**END**

------ ----------------------------------------------- Before CWDEMCB2.526 ->
000523 B CALL 'CWCDSUBA' USING EMP-RECORD-LIST CWCDWRKA.
000524
=====> MOVE EMP-NUM-LIST TO EMPNUMB.
3. Press PF12 to continue execution of the calling program. The screen displays the
*** TRANSACTION COMPLETE *** message (Figure 5-12).


EMPLOYEE NAME: JOHN SMITH
HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 50.00
GROSS PAY: 2000.00

Stepping Through Subroutines and User Condition

Handlers
This section explains how Xpediters stepping function works with selected and
unselected static and dynamic subroutines and Language Environment user condition
handlers (UCHs).
Dynamically Called Subroutines

As demonstrated in the previous sections, Xpediter can step (GO n) through static
subroutines. It can also step through dynamically called subroutines. At execution time,
support is essentially the same.
Support differs, however, at the time breakpoints are set. Setting a breakpoint in a static
subroutine automatically causes it to be selected, but Xpediter lets you set a breakpoint
in a dynamic subroutine with or without first selecting it. Xpediter allows the breakpoint
because dynamic subroutines are independent load modules which Xpediter cannot
distinguish from main programs until execution time. A module might act as a dynamic
subroutine under one transaction, then be invoked as the main program of another
transaction.
Remember, however, that if a breakpoint is set in a dynamic subroutine without first

selecting it, when a call to it from the main program is stepped, the breakpoint will be
ignored. The same thing would happen if you set a breakpoint in a static subroutine,
then deselected it from the 2.6.1 screen. The breakpoint in the static subroutine would be
ignored when the call to it was stepped.
Dynamic subroutines can be selected on the List of CSECTs screen (2.6.1) by first typing
the module name in the MODULE field at the top of the screen. After Xpediter returns
the CSECT information, the module can be selected in the same way as any other CSECT.
Automatic Selection of CSECTs

Under certain circumstances, Xpediter will automatically select a CSECT, generating an
entry on the List of CSECTs screen (2.6.1). Auto-selection depends on a number of factors
such as whether or not the program is being stepped and whether or not the load module
and the main CSECT share the same name. Setting a breakpoint in a static subroutine
automatically selects it. Table 5-1 summarizes Xpediters operation in various situations.
Table 5-1. Stepping, Resuming, and Auto-Selection of CSECTs

Operation Xpediter Action
Xpediter will auto-select the main program CSECT if its name is different from the name
Module load via 2.L or 2.6.1
of the load module.
Breakpoint or abend encountered
Xpediter will halt execution and auto-select the CSECT, if it is not the mainline program.
at transaction startup
Breakpoint or abend after RESUME
Xpediter will halt execution and auto-select the CSECT, if it is not the mainline program.
or GO
If the breakpoint or abend is encountered in the main program or a CSECT already
selected on the 2.6.1 screen, Xpediter will halt execution.
Xpediter will ignore breakpoints in subroutines that are not selected.

Breakpoint or abend when
For example, if a call statement to an unselected dynamic subroutine is stepped,
stepping (GO n)
Xpediter will ignore any breakpoints in the subroutine and position to the statement after
the call.
If abend occurs in unselected subroutine, Xpediter will position to the call statement
in the calling module.
Xpediter will step into the selected CSECT and indicate that a program boundary has
been crossed.
Selected CSECT in call sequence
For example, if stepping a mainline program call statement to an unselected subroutine
when stepping (GO n)
which in turn calls a selected subroutine, Xpediter will step into the selected subroutine
and indicate that a program boundary has been crossed. The intermediate unselected
CSECT is executed transparently.
As shown in the table, with the GO (or RESUME) command, Xpediter will stop at a
breakpoint regardless of the CSECTs selection status. If the CSECT is unselected and not
the main program CSECT, Xpediter will auto-select it. The CSECT will remain selected
until it is manually unselected or the session is ended.
The stepping function (GO n), however, stops at breakpoints only in selected CSECTs. If a
CSECT is unselected, stepping will execute it transparently regardless of whether or
not it contains a breakpoint and the CSECT will not be auto-selected.
Language Environment User Condition Handlers

Xpediter makes it possible for you to step through any user condition handler (UCH)
registered with Language Environments callable services. The way Xpediter stepping
works with UCHs is similar to the stepping of subroutines. Xpediters trace and storage
protection monitoring functions treat UCHs as independent units, following the same
rules as for EXEC CICS LINK operations. Refer to the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual for
more information.
UCHs are driven in the following situations:
When the Language Environment condition manager detects a condition

When an application issues a call signal
When an abend occurs.
All three situations are treated as conditions. If a statement being stepped causes a
condition to be raised, Xpediter will step into the UCH, but only if it is selected on the
List of CSECTs screen (2.6.1).
Note that if the condition is the result of an abend and Xpediter was set up on the Trap
Abend screen (1.6) to trap it, Xpediters trap will preempt Language Environments
condition handler. To allow the UCH to get control, the TRAP ABEND option on the 1.6
screen should be set to NO. See the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual for more information on
the trap facility.
If the UCH is able to correct the condition and retry, Xpediter will step back into the
main program or selected subroutine at the location where execution is being resumed.
Table 5-2 summarizes Xpediters criteria and resulting actions in regard to UCHs.
Table 5-2. Stepping User Condition Handlers
Situation When Stepping
Xpediter Action
(GO n)
Xpediter will step into the UCH if it was selected on the 2.6.1 screen.
Unlike the stepping of CSECTs, if the UCH is not selected but a

subroutine is, Xpediter will not step into the lower-level subroutine.
Statement raises a condition For example, if a mainline program add statement causes an abend while
stepping, and the UCH is not selected, Xpediter will ignore any subroutines
called by the UCH even if they are selected.
If the UCH is selected, Xpediter will step into it and any of its subroutines
that are also selected.
When a statement is being stepped and causes a condition to be raised,
UCH percolates or promotes
Xpediter will step into any selected UCH invoked by the percolation
condition.
request, regardless of the status of the UCH issuing that request.
When a statement is being stepped and causes a condition to be
raised, Xpediter will step back into the module being resumed into if
it is selected.
If the module being resumed into is not selected, Xpediter will

position after the call in the next higher selected module or mainline
UCH corrects condition, program.
issues RESUME.
For example, if a mainline program call to an unselected subroutine is
stepped, and the subroutine causes an abend, the UCH will get control. If
the UCH resumes into that unselected subroutine, Xpediter will position
back into the mainline program at the statement just after the call to the
subroutine. If the subroutine had been selected, Xpediter would have
positioned at the resume location in the subroutine.
Using the CSECT Selections Screen

If you know the name of the load module and CSECT that you want to test, the CSECT
Selections screen (2.6.2) (Figure 5-13) lets you directly enter a load module name and
CSECT name. The CSECT offset and length are automatically determined by
Xpediter/CICS. This screen also provides a summary of all CSECTs that you have selected
from the List of CSECTs screen (2.6.1) as shown in Figure 5-3 on page 5-3.
Figure 5-13. CSECT Selections Screen (2.6.2)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - CSECT SELECTIONS (2.6.2) --------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001
DEL MODULE CSECT LISTING OFFSET LENGTH ADDRESS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ CWDEMCB2 CWCDSUBA CWCDSUBA 00002048 000000C4 3BB050C8
_ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Using Profiles to Select CSECTs

If you know you will be working with some CSECTs through many test sessions, you can
set up a profile that will select those CSECTs automatically whenever you access
Xpediter/CICS.
1. Type XPED 0.1 on a blank CICS screen and press Enter to display the Set Profile
Defaults screen (0.1).
2. Press PF8 to display the next page of the Set Profile Defaults screen (Figure 5-14).
Figure 5-14. Set Profile Defaults Screen (0.1)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - SET PROFILE DEFAULTS (0.1) -------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

KEEP OPTIONS:
KEEP ===> 5 (0/3-11/OFF) Open/close the KEEP window
AUTOKEEP ===> ON (ON/OFF) Show automatic keeps
IKEEP ===> ON (ON/OFF) Intellikeeps (Intelligent Autokeeps)
WIDEHEX ===> NO (YES/NO) Use entire lines to show HEX data

TERMINAL OPTIONS:
ALT ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Set alternate screen size
OPT ===> ON (ON/OFF) Enable 3270 data stream optimizer
ALARM ===> ON (ON/OFF) Enable terminal alarm at error
DELIM ===> ; (;/delim) Command Delimiter (Default: semi-colon)
CMDSIZE ===> 1 (1/2/3) Number of COMMAND input lines
TRANSLATE ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Use profile-level output translate table

For the 1st CSECT entry below, specify ALL or NONE. Otherwise, enter all
csect-names (max 6) that are to be automatically selected.
CSECT 1 ===> NONE CSECT 2 ===> ________________
CSECT 3 ===> ________________ CSECT 4 ===> ________________
CSECT 5 ===> ________________ CSECT 6 ===> ________________
***END***
3. Type CWCDSUBA over the NONE value in the CSECT 1 field.

4. Press Enter to update the field.
5. Save the profile by typing =0.5 in the COMMAND field and pressing Enter. The Save
Profile screen (0.5) (Figure 5-15) is displayed.
Figure 5-15. Save Profile Screen (0.5)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SAVE PROFILE (0.5) -----------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

SAVE DEFAULT VALUES TO PROFILE ===> AUTOSEL

To save the current profile, specify the profile name and press ENTER.
6. Type AUTOSEL in the PROFILE NAME field and press Enter to save the profile.
7. To load the profile for your next debugging session, enter XPED P=AUTOSEL on a
blank CICS screen. The profile is loaded, and the CWCDSUBA CSECT is automatically
selected.
This technique can also be used to set the CSECT field to ALL, selecting ALL CSECTS
when this profile is loaded.
6-1
Chapter 6.
Analyzing Program Execution Chap 6
This chapter shows how to analyze the execution of a program in order to uncover loops
and dead code as well as validate logic paths. It discusses how to prepare for analysis of a
program, execute the program, then analyze the data.
The COUNT command is used to designate portions of the application code you want to
analyze. As each designated statement is executed, a counter is incremented. After your
test is completed, Xpediter/CICS examines the counters and provides statistics about the
executed code.

Setting Up the Analysis

1. Type XPED CWDEMCB2 in the upper left corner of a blank CICS screen and press
Enter.
2. Type COUNT ALL PARA in the COMMAND field and press Enter.
The message
SET AT NEXT EXECUTABLE VERB
appears. This indicates that counts have been set on all paragraphs in the program.
3. Type SET FOOT ANALYZE and press Enter to display the STATEMENT ANALYSIS
footing. When you are done using FOOT ANALYZE (or any FOOT command), turn it
off by typing SET FOOT OFF and pressing Enter.
4. Type =1.1 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the List Breakpoints
screen (1.1) (Figure 6-1).
Figure 6-1. Setting Up Analysis on the List Breakpoints Screen (1.1)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - LIST BREAKPOINTS (1.1) ---------------C123


BREAK AT
-STMT- -OFFSET- ---------------- SOURCE / CONDITION -----------------------
000300 C 00000E28 PROCEDURE DIVISION. 0000000
000315 C 00000F0A 100-SEND-INITIAL-SCREEN. 0000000
000329 C 00000FA6 200-RECEIVE-INPUT. 0000000
000357 C 00001108 300-EMPLOYEE-PAY-RTN. 0000000
000392 C 000012A6 400-TRANSACTION-COMPLETE. 0000000
000407 C 0000136E 500-MAPERR. 0000000
000410 C 0000137E 600-SEND-PAY-MAP. 0000000
000420 C 00001400 700-RETURN-TO-TRAN. 0000000
000427 C 0000145C 800-RETURN-TO-CICS. 0000000
000430 C 0000149A 900-PROCESS-00002-SELECTION. 0000000
000482 C 00001796 950-PROCESS-00003-SELECTION. 0000000
000500 C 000018EA 960-PROCESS-00004-SELECTION. 0000000
000517 C 00001A44 970-PROCESS-00005-SELECTION. 0000000
-------------------- S T A T E M E N T A N A L Y S I S --------------------
STATEMENTS TO BE ANALYZED: 18 TOTAL ANALYZED COUNT: 0
ANALYZED STATEMENTS EXECUTED: 0 HIGHEST COUNT: 0
ANALYZED STATEMENTS NOT EXEC: 18 HIGHEST COUNT STMT: 000000
PERCENTAGE STATEMENTS EXEC: 0 PARA: PROCEDURE DIVISION
This screen shows the statements that were set to be counted, as well as the statistics
concerning the execution. The STATEMENTS TO BE ANALYZED field is set to 18,
indicating that there are 18 paragraphs in the program in this example. The ANALYZED
STATEMENTS NOT EXEC field is set to 18 because the program has not been executed
yet. All other values are set to 0 for the same reason. Notice that the COUNT fields for
each statement are set to 0.
Executing the Program

1. Press Clear to return to CICS and execute the program.
2. Type XCB2 in the upper left corner of the screen.
3. Press Enter to display the XCB2 Demonstration Transaction screen.
CAUTION:
The next step causes a storage violation. Before performing that step, you should
make sure your CICS region is not configured to terminate in response to storage
violations.
4. Type 00333 and press Enter. The XCB2 message screen appears, indicating that a
storage violation has occurred (Figure 6-2).
In this example, Xpediter/CICS allowed a storage violation to occur because storage
protection was turned OFF. The storage violation option was used because it provides
a graphic example of a looping problem.
Analyzing Program Execution 6-3
Figure 6-2. Storage Violation on the Demonstration Transaction Screen


*** CWDEMCB2 HAS CAUSED A STORAGE VIOLATION ***

Analyzing the Data

1. Press Clear.
2. Type XPED CWDEMCB2 in the upper left corner of the screen and press Enter to
display the Source Listing screen (2.L).
The STATEMENT ANALYSIS area displays statistics for the last execution of
CWDEMCB2, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Showing Statistics For Analysis on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000300 PROCEDURE DIVISION. 0000002
000304 END-EXEC.
000307 NOHANDLE
000308 END-EXEC.
000309
000312 ELSE
000314
PERCENTAGE STATEMENTS EXEC: 50 PARA: 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP
In this example, the statistics in the STATEMENT ANALYSIS area have changed to
show the number of statements that were executed.
This area shows that 18 statements were set for analysis. Of these, nine were executed
and nine were not. The nine paragraphs were executed a total of 26 times (TOTAL
ANALYZED COUNT), with one executing 17 times (HIGHEST COUNT). This indicates
a loop in the program. HIGHEST COUNT STMT points to the statement number
where the loop occurred. PARA shows the name of the paragraph that contains that
statement.
Also note that the COUNT parameters have changed. The first statement was
executed twice: once to send the initial XCB2 screen and once to process the
information on that screen.
3. Type L 558 in the COMMAND field to locate statement 558 and press Enter to see
where and why the loop occurred (Figure 6-4).
Figure 6-4. Browsing Source Code on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000558 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP. 0000017
000559 MOVE 'V' TO LS-FIELD-WITH-1 (LS-SUBSCRIPT).
000560 IF LS-SUBSCRIPT > +16
000561 GO TO 1080-INITIALIZATION-DONE.
000562 ADD +1 TO LS-SUBSCRIPT.
000563 GO TO 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP.
000564
000565 1080-INITIALIZATION-DONE. 0000001
000566 IF LS-SUBSCRIPT > +16 AND
000567 LS-FIELD-WITH-1 (LS-SUBSCRIPT) = 'V'
000568 MOVE STOR-VIOLATION-MSG TO MAP2-LINE5
000569 ELSE
000570 MOVE NO-STOR-VIOLATION-MSG TO MAP2-LINE5.
000571
000572 1100-SEND-MAP. 0000001
PERCENTAGE STATEMENTS EXEC: 50 PARA: 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP
In this case, the loop occurred because the subscript is being checked for a maximum
value greater than 16, while the table has only 16 entries.
You can use the FIND COUNT command to browse through the source listing and
examine the COUNT associated with each paragraph. You can also use the SHOW
COUNT command to display the lines selected for analysis. By looking at these counts,
you can easily see how your program is processing. If Xpediters trace function has been
activated, you can also view the Program Trace screen (2.4) to review the logic flow.
You can reset the analysis by entering a new COUNT command. It can be turned off by
entering DELETE COUNT.
You can also use the COUNT command to check the overall efficiency of your program.
Use the COUNT ALL PARA command to set up an analysis for the entire program, then
execute each logic path in the program without resetting the analysis. Review the
STATEMENT ANALYSIS to determine if any code has not been executed. By leaving the
analysis active and executing all logic paths in the program, you can easily pinpoint code
that was not executed.
Remember to end the session as described in Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a

7-1
Chapter 7.
Monitoring Tasks Started from Remote Terminals Chap 7
This chapter describes how to use the Trap Summary screen (1.6) to monitor remote
terminals and non-terminal related tasks. The Trap Summary screen assigns a master
terminal to be used to trap abends occurring at other terminals or in non-terminal tasks.
The first four sections in this chapter assume that an end user is experiencing a problem
with a program. A person in the systems group will monitor the program for abends.
These sections show how to set remote traps and view a remote session, how to defer
remote trap selection, and how to release trapped terminals. The last section explains the
technique you should use when debugging programs that are not related to terminals.
Note: For information on debugging MRO and ISC transactions, distributed transaction
processing, and distributed program link, refer to the Xpediter/CICS Reference
Manual.
Note: The demonstrations in this chapter should be performed in Xpediter/CICSs

standard operating mode not one of the three restricted modes. For more
information, see the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
Setting Remote Traps

1. On a blank CICS screen, type XPED and press Enter. The Xpediter/CICS Primary
Menu will be displayed.
2. Select the session control option by typing 1 in the COMMAND field and pressing
Enter. The Session Control Menu appears (Figure 7-1).
Figure 7-1. Session Control Menu
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SESSION CONTROL MENU (1) --------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

1 LIST BREAKPOINTS - Display breakpoints for a single program
3 LIST ABENDS - Display abends associated with the session
4 TRACE SUMMARY - Display program trace entries
5 SAVED TRAPS - Display saved local or remote traps
6 TRAP SUMMARY - Display local or remote traps
7 INTERCEPT SUMMARY - Display active intercepts
8 STORAGE PROTECTION - Set storage protection options
9 USER LABELS - Define user labels
M MONITOR SUMMARY - Display active MONITOR entries
N NEWCOPY PROGRAMS - NEWCOPY (phasein) programs
P RESOURCE SUMMARY - Display count of breakpoints and keeps
3. Type 6 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The Trap Summary screen (1.6)
appears. This screen is used to specify the terminals to be monitored for abends
and/or breakpoints.
The display on your screen will show an entry for your terminal. When the XPED
and XPRT transactions are used, an abend trap is automatically set for the terminal
on which these transactions are entered.
In this example, you know the transaction that is causing the problem. Set an abend
trap for a remote terminal.
4. Type ALL in the NETNAME and TERM fields.
5. Type XCB2 in the TRAN field.
6. Type an asterisk (*) in the PROGRAM field and press Enter to specify that all
programs involved in transaction XCB2 are monitored.
In Figure 7-2, for example, three traps have been set:
For any transaction entered from terminal A011.
For XCB2 transaction regardless of its origin. This means that all transactions
and programs executed at A011 are monitored for abends, as well as any
programs involved in the transaction XCB2. If abend situations occur, the
information is displayed on your terminal.
The third trap is an enhanced trap. If an abend occurs in any program beginning
with CWDEM running at terminal A999, and the initial commarea associated
with the task contains the string test starting in position 16 for a length of 4,
the information is displayed on your terminal. Also, any breakpoints in programs
beginning with CWDEM will be taken if the initial commarea meets the criteria
above and the transaction was started on terminal A999.
7. Press Clear to return to a blank CICS screen.
Figure 7-2. Setting a Trap on the Trap Summary Screen (1.6)

MODULE: CSECT:
M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** A011 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ******** ******** **** XCB2 ******** YES
IF
_ ******** ******** A999 **** CWDEM*** YES
IF INITCOMM(16:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
Viewing a Remote Session

Start the demonstration transaction from another terminal.
1. Log on to the CICS region at another terminal.

2. Type XCB2 on a blank CICS screen and press Enter. The Demonstration Transaction
screen is displayed.
3. Type 00001 and press Enter to cause an ASRA abend. The terminal is suspended.
4. Return to the original terminal. The Source Listing screen (2.L) (Figure 7-3) is
displayed showing CWDEMCB2 with a message that a remote abend has been
selected.
Monitoring Tasks Started from Remote Terminals 7-3
Figure 7-3. Reviewing a Remote Task on the Source Listing Screen

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ********* A REMOTE BREAK/ABEND HAS BEEN SELECTED **********
**END**

000356
=====> COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
000363
000366
000369
You now have control over the execution of this program. You can set breakpoints,
skips, and keeps, view program storage, step through the program, and resume
execution at another point. In this demonstration, you fix the data and continue
processing.
5. Position the cursor over the $$$ in WA-HOURS, type 040, and press Enter.
6. Type =1.6 in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The Trap Summary screen (1.6)
(Figure 7-4 on page 7-3) is displayed. Notice that the second trap entry has a
highlighted arrow following the CMD field. This arrow indicates which trap caused
the task to be routed to your session.
Figure 7-4. Trap Indicated on Trap Summary Screen (1.6)

MODULE: CSECT:
M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** A011 **** ******** YES
IF
_ => ******** ******** **** XCB2 ******** YES
IF
_ ******** ******** A999 **** CWDEM*** YES
IF INITCOMM(16:4) = T'TEST'
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
7. Return to the Source Listing screen (2.L) by typing SOURCE in the COMMAND field
and pressing Enter.
8. Press PF12 (GO) to continue processing. The message TASK WAS RESUMED is
displayed (Figure 7-5), and control is returned to the user terminal (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-5. Resuming a Remote Task on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ******************** TASK WAS RESUMED *********************
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000356
000359 COMPUTE CURR-PAY EQUAL WA-HOURS * WA-RATE
000363
000366
000369
000370 ** EXAMPLES OF COBOL 88 LEVEL FIELDS.....
000371 IF CBL88-A
000372 MOVE 'Y' TO CBL88-PARENT-A.
000373 IF CBL88-B
000374 MOVE '88' TO CBL88-PARENT-B.
000375 IF CBL88-C
Figure 7-6. Demonstration Transaction Screen from the User Terminal


HOURS WORKED: 040
HOURLY RATE: 9.50
GROSS PAY: 380.00

Deferring Remote Trap Selection

If you set an abend trap for a commonly used transaction, and an abend occurs while you
are busy working on a task outside of Xpediter/CICS, you can defer viewing the trap
information. When you finish the other task, Xpediter/CICS displays the Source Listing
screen (2.L) with a message that an abend has occurred. At this point, you can choose to
resolve the abend, or you can defer working on it by pressing Clear and returning to
CICS. The abend is still trapped, the users terminal is suspended, and your terminal is
clear to be used for other functions. You can return to the abend at a later time. Note,
however, that the user terminal will remain suspended until it is released.
The List Abends screen (1.3) (Figure 7-7) displays the break/abend summary information
retained each time a break/abend is trapped. If a remote break/abend is still active, it is
highlighted and can be selected by typing an S in the SEL column and pressing Enter. The
Source Listing screen (2.L) is displayed for that task, and you have control over the
execution of the program. Other entries shown on this screen are abends that have been
trapped by this terminal during the debugging session.
Figure 7-7. List Abends Screen (1.3)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - LIST ABENDS (1.3) ------------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

CLIENT-IPADDR /
SEL TERM NETNAME TRAN PROGRAM STMT OFFSET ABEND TIME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ 1309 TCW01309 XCB2 CWDEMCB2 000423 00F04 ASRA 17:02:34
1309 TCW01309 XCB2 CWDEMCB2 000423 00F04 ASRA 17:02:20
**END**
Releasing Trapped Transactions

Abend traps entered on the Trap Summary screen (1.6) (Figure 7-2 on page 7-2) are in
effect throughout a debugging session. Xpediter/CICS monitors the user IDs, NETNAMEs,
terminals, transactions, and programs for which traps are set until you turn the traps off
or end the debugging session. In addition, all abends trapped during your debugging
session must be resolved or released before the users terminal regains control over the
program.
You can release the trapped transactions in one of several ways:
Intercept the trap, fix the problem, and resume the program.
Temporarily remove your trap and resume the program without fixing the problem.
Select the trapped task on the List Abends screen (1.3), then access the Exit Session
screen (X) and request a dump of the program.
End the debugging session by entering =X from any Xpediter/CICS screen.
When you end your session while remote abends are waiting and traps are active, all
trapped transactions are automatically freed and all abend traps are reset. To end your
session:
1. Type =X and press Enter. The Exit Session screen (X) (Figure 7-8) appears.
The lower portion of the Exit Session screen displays a summary of the current
testing session. The ACTIVE ABEND TRAPS field lets you know that you could be
receiving trap bulletins. The WAITING TASKS field indicates the number of remote
abends that have been trapped and have not yet been resumed or terminated. These
transactions are suspended until they are freed.
2. Type Y in the END SESSION field. If a dump is required, type Y in the DUMP OPTION
field. If you would like to execute a user or system script, type the script member
name in the POST SCRIPT field. Press Enter.
Figure 7-8. Exit Session Screen (X)

COMMAND ===>


DUMP OPTION: NO YES forces a dump (or Abend-AID for CICS report) for



To release a remotely trapped transaction without ending your session, do the following:
1. Select the transaction to be released on the List Abends screen (1.3).

2. Type =X and press Enter. The Exit Session screen (X) (Figure 7-8) appears.
3. Leave NO in the END SESSION field and type Y in the DUMP OPTION field. Press
Enter. With the DUMP OPTION field set to YES, Xpediter/CICS will generate a CICS
transaction dump and free the currently selected trapped transaction.
Note: If you clear the screen or press Enter on the Exit Session screen (X) with NO in the
END SESSION and DUMP OPTION fields, any remotely trapped transactions will
not be freed.
Viewing Traps for Asynchronous Transactions

The second entry shown in Figure 7-9 traps abends that occur only in asynchronous
transactions executing program ASYNCPGM.
Figure 7-9. Trap for Asynchronous Tasks on the Trap Summary Screen (1.6)

MODULE: CSECT:
M (Move) S (Save)

----------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** A011 **** ******** YES
IF
_ ******** ******** NONE **** ASYNCPGM YES
IF
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
To prepare for debugging an asynchronous task, set a trap as shown in Figure 7-9 to
provide abend protection for the program. Also set a breakpoint at the beginning of the
program to give you control of the program as soon as it starts.
To set a breakpoint at the beginning of a program, type the program name in the
MODULE field in the upper left portion of the screen, type BEFORE in the COMMAND
field, and press Enter.
8-1
Chapter 8.
Providing Storage Protection Chap 8
This chapter discusses the storage protection features of Xpediter/CICS, including setting
storage protection and allowing storage violations.
The first two sections show how Xpediter/CICS handles a storage violation and how you
can allow processing to continue after a violation has been intercepted. This exercise is
done using the XPED transaction.
For more information regarding storage violation protection, refer to the Xpediter/CICS
Reference Manual.

Setting Storage Protection

If you have a program that is ready to go into production, you should test it to make sure
it is not causing storage violations. To do this, you use XPED to set up storage protection,
and then test the transaction.
1. Type XPED 1.8 in the upper left corner of a blank CICS screen.
2. Press Enter to display the Storage Protection screen (1.8) (Figure 8-1).
Figure 8-1. Storage Protection Screen (1.8)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - STORAGE PROTECTION (1.8) --------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000000
LINE COMMANDS: A (After) B (Before) C (Copy) D (Delete) I (Insert) M (Move)

-----------PROTECTION OPTIONS-------
CMD TYPE TERM TRAN PROGRAM STORE FETCH SHR PGM CMD Store
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
3. Type CWDEMCB2 in the PROGRAM field in the middle of the screen and type Y in
the STORE field under PROTECTION OPTIONS.
4. Press Enter to enter these values and redisplay the Storage Protection screen (1.8). See
Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2. Storage Protection Screen (1.8) with a Protection Entry

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ USER 0074 **** CWDEMCB2 YES NO NO NO NO
_ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
On the Storage Protection screen (1.8), Xpediter/CICS assigns a value of USER in the
TYPE field, indicating that this entry was set up by the user. The current terminal is
automatically entered in the TERM field.
The asterisks in the TRAN field indicate that this entry is valid for any transaction that
executes the program CWDEMCB2. The protection options FETCH, SHR, PGM, and CMD
Store are automatically set to NO. These entries are valid during the current debugging
session. For more information about these fields, press PF1.
Allowing Storage Violations

1. Press Clear to return to CICS to test the transaction.
2. Type XCB2 on a blank screen.
3. Press Enter to display the XCB2 Demonstration Transaction screen.
4. Type 00333 to cause a storage violation.
5. Press Enter to display the Source Listing screen (2.L) (Figure 8-3). On this screen,
Xpediter/CICS displays the messages
*****************SUBSCRIPT OUT OF BOUNDS*****************
and
------------ STOR (OVERLAPPING END STORG CHECK ZONE) at CWDEMCB2.559 ->
to show that a potential storage violation has been intercepted and prevented.
When storage protection is turned ON, Xpediter/CICS intercepts any program that
attempts to write in a CICS storage area that the program does not own.
Xpediter/CICS intercepts all programs that violate CICS storage, but in certain
instances, you may not agree with its analysis. The ALLOW command is used for
these cases.
In this example, the user might decide that the subscript is acceptable and that the
ALLOW command should be used to permit the storage violation to occur.
Providing Storage Protection 8-3
Figure 8-3. Source Listing Screen (2.L) - Intercepting a Storage Violation

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ***************** SUBSCRIPT OUT OF BOUNDS *****************
02 LS-FIELD-WITH-1 X(1) V
OCCURS 16 TIMES 1
77 LS-SUBSCRIPT S9(3) COMP-3 +017
**END**

------ ----------- STOR (OVERLAPPING END STORG CHECK ZONE) at CWDEMCB2.559 ->
000556 1040-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-WITH-V.
000557 MOVE +1 TO LS-SUBSCRIPT.
000558 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP.
=====> MOVE 'V' TO LS-FIELD-WITH-1 (LS-SUBSCRIPT).
000561 1 GO TO 1080-INITIALIZATION-DONE.
000562 ADD +1 TO LS-SUBSCRIPT.
000563 GO TO 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP.
000564
000565 1080-INITIALIZATION-DONE.
000566 IF LS-SUBSCRIPT > +16 AND
000567 LS-FIELD-WITH-1 (LS-SUBSCRIPT) = 'V'
000568 1 MOVE STOR-VIOLATION-MSG TO MAP2-LINE5
000569 ELSE
Note: Xpediter/CICS is shipped with the ALLOWCM global parameter set to OFF for the
XPED transaction. Unless this value has been changed to ON at your site, you
will be unable to use the ALLOW command to allow the storage violation
described here. Read the remainder of the exercise to understand the concepts
presented.
6. Type ALLOW in the COMMAND field.

7. Press Enter to redisplay the Source Listing screen (2.L). Depending on the situation,
one of three things will happen:
a. The message
****** THE CURRENT STORAGE VIOL. WILL BE ALLOWED *******
is displayed to show that Xpediter/CICS will allow the storage violation to occur.
You would continue with the next step.
b. If the message
****** ALLOW COMMAND IS DISABLED IN GLOBAL TABLE ******
is displayed, ALLOWCM is set to OFF in the Xpediter/CICS global table, and

storage violations will not be allowed. If you want to use the ALLOW command,
talk to your site installer to have the ALLOWCM parameter value changed. Read
the remainder of the exercise to understand the concepts presented.
c. If the message
****** NOT ALLOWED TO VIOLATE CICS CONTROL INFO ******
is displayed, Xpediter/CICS has prevented you from accidentally overwriting

CICS storage check zones and causing a CICS storage violation, even though the
ALLOWCM parameter is set to ON. If you examine the program, you will notice
that the subscript is, in fact, too large for the area defined. The only way to
continue with this example is to manually change the value of LS-SUBSCRIPT to
17, for example, then use the GOTO command to resume from the next
statement. You can chose to do this before continuing with the next step, or
simply read the remainder of the exercise to understand the concepts presented.
8. Press PF12 to resume processing of the program. The program screen shown in Figure
8-4 appears, indicating that a storage violation occurred.
Figure 8-4. Demonstration Transaction Screen: Displaying a Storage Violation


*** CWDEMCB2 HAS CAUSED A STORAGE VIOLATION ***


9-1
Chapter 9.
Interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS Chap 9
This chapter discusses the interface to Abend-AID for CICS, which allows you to access
Abend-AID for CICS without leaving Xpediter/CICS.
This exercise assumes that you have completed the examples in Chapter 3, Testing a
COBOL Program.
In this chapter, Xpediter/CICS is turned on to monitor the XCB2 transaction, which

abends with an AEIM. Abend-AID for CICS is used to help solve the abend.
Note: If your site is using a release of Abend-AID for CICS other than that shown in this
chapter, your screens may appear different.

Turning on Abend-AID for CICS

Abend-AID for CICS must be installed and turned on before interfacing with
Xpediter/CICS. If Abend-AID for CICS is already turned on, go to step 1 in the next
section. If Abend-AID for CICS is not turned on, complete the following steps:
1. Sign on to a valid CICS region.

2. Type AAON ON in the upper left corner of a blank CICS screen.
3. Press Enter. Abend-AID for CICS will display messages similar to the following:
CCACI0035I Abend-AID for CICS turned on in region APPLID ACMEC123 at...

CCACI0046I CICS APPLID ACMEC123 SYSID ACM1 connected to view server...
CCACI0074I CICS APPLID ACMEC123 on system ACM1 connected to TDCAS CF45...
Refer to the Abend-AID for CICS Reference Manual for more information on the use of Abend-
AID for CICS.
Accessing Abend-AID for CICS through Xpediter/CICS

1. To access Xpediter/CICS, type XPED in the upper left corner of a blank CICS screen.
2. Press Enter to display the Primary Menu shown in Figure 9-1.

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:





3. Press Clear. Xpediter/CICS is now set to trap abends.

4. Type XCB2 and press Enter. The Demonstration Transaction screen is displayed
(Figure 9-2).


5. To cause an AEIM abend, type 00002 in the field preceding ENTER EMPLOYEE
NUMBER and press Enter. The Source Listing screen (2.L) (Figure 9-3) will be
displayed.
Xpediter/CICS intercepts the abend and reports on the status of the problem.
However, you may need more information to resolve the problem. To obtain it, we
will access Abend-AID for CICS and issue a snap dump to produce a diagnostic report
for this AEIM abend.
Interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS 9-3

01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD GROUP 00002...................
02 EMP-NUM-KEY X(5) 00002
77 EMP-REC-LEN S9(4) COMP +0080
77 EMP-KEY-LEN S9(4) COMP +0005
**END**
------ ------------------ AEIM ("NOTFND" RECORD NOT FOUND) at CWDEMCB2.433 ->
000431 ** READ VSAM FILE FOR RECORD.....
000432 MOVE PAYEMP1 TO EMP-NUM-KEY.
=====> EXEC CICS READ INTO (VSAM-EMP-RECORD)
000434 DATASET ('DBUGEMP')
000435 RIDFLD (EMP-NUM-KEY)
000436 LENGTH (EMP-REC-LEN)
000437 KEYLENGTH (EMP-KEY-LEN)
000438 END-EXEC.
000439
000440 ** INITIALIZE WORKING STORAGE TABLE WITH ZEROS......
000441 MOVE ZEROS TO EMP-RECORD-TABLE.
000442
000443 ** STORE RECORD INTO WORKING STORAGE TABLE.....
6. Type MENU in the COMMAND field and press Enter to redisplay the Xpediter/CICS
Primary Menu.
7. Type 7 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the Abend-AID for CICS
Interface menu (7) (Figure 9-4).
Figure 9-4. Abend-AID for CICS Interface Menu (7)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - ABEND-AID FOR CICS INTERFACE (7) ----------C123

COMMAND ===>

1 SNAP DUMP - Issue Abend-AID for CICS snap dump
2 REPORT DIRECTORY - Display Abend-AID for CICS report directory
3 DIAGNOSTICS - Display Abend-AID for CICS abend code diagnostic text
Issuing an Abend-AID for CICS Snap Dump

Abend-AID for CICS is an abend analysis tool that intercepts calls to the dump control
program and produces a diagnostic report. The report explains where an abend occurred,
why it happened, and how it can be fixed. To get this information, you must issue a snap
dump request.
1. To issue a snap dump, type 1 in the COMMAND field of the Abend-AID for CICS
Interface Menu (7).
2. Press Enter. A snap dump is taken for the AEIM abend, and Abend-AID for CICS is
automatically invoked to create the report for this abend. The Diagnostic Summary
of the Abend-AID for CICS report appears as shown in Figure 9-5.
Note: If the report file is set up to suppress duplicate reports and the current snap is
deemed a duplicate and suppressed, Abend-AID will not return a report
number to Xpediter. This will cause the report file directory to be displayed
instead of the current report. From the directory screen, you may use Abend-
AIDs masking facilities to filter the reports that are displayed.
The Diagnostic Summary gives detailed diagnostics about the trapped abend. The
paragraph at the top of the screen identifies the abend code (AEIM), program name
(CWDEMCB2), abending transaction (XCB2), terminal, and user ID. Additional
paragraphs provide a detailed analysis of the abend.
Figure 9-5. Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostic Summary Screen
Abend-AID for CICS -------- Diagnostic Summary -------- Row 000001 of 000063

An AEIM abend occurred in program CWDEMCB2. The abending transaction was
XCB2 running at terminal 0023 for user ID MYUSRID.

Analysis of the abend:

The AEIM abend occurred when a READ request to a file (or User maintained
Data Table) DBUGEMP could not be satisfied because the record desired could
not be found in the file.

If this is a Data Table, the record may be present but may have been
rejected at initial load time by user exit "XDTRD" or may have been
subsequently deleted from the data table.

You may want to specify "HANDLE CONDITION NOTFND.." to trap this condition
in the future. The following is the search argument of the record that was
not found on Data Set DBUGEMP :

Level/Field Name Picture/Type Value
01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD
Entry=0000129(ACMEC123) Code=AEIM CF450QCV AssistMenu=PF24 More...
3. Press PF8 to scroll through the report. A report example is shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6. Diagnostic Summary Screen (continued)

Next Sequential Instruction

This statement is contained in paragraph "900-PROCESS-00002-SELECTION" of
program CWDEMCB2.

The program was compiled on 28MAY2003 at 11:11:29 and is 002020 bytes long.
It is part of load module CWDEMCB2 which was loaded from
SALESSUP.ACMEC123.LOADLIB. It was link edited on 28MAY2003. The load module is
002C38 bytes long. The program AMODE is ANY. The program RMODE is ANY.

The execution key for this program was USER_KEY.

Last Call or EXEC CICS Request

The last call or 'EXEC CICS' command was:
The Abend-AID for CICS report contains additional information that can be directly
accessed by entering the sections number or name in the COMMAND field.
4. To display a menu of the report sections, press PF6. A report menu appears as shown
in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7. Abend-AID for CICS Report Menu
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE

Analysis of the abend:
to handle the condition using the "EXEC CICS HANDLE CONDITION' command. If
necessary, use t ----------- Row 00001 of 00020 ------------ or information
from the CICS tr | 1 or DIAG - Diagnostic Summary | of the
exception condit | 2 or NSI - Diagnostic Summary |
| 3 or REGS - Registers |
| 4 or TRACE - CICS Trace |
Next Sequential | 5 or ENQ - Enqueues Held |
| 6 or EIB - User EIB |
The next stateme | 7 or PROG - Program Information Menu |
| 8 or PLIST - Program Link Summary |
000575 | 9 or PSTOR - Program Link Summary | YMSG.
| 10 or LINK - Program Link Summary |
This statement i | 11 or EXTER - Program Link Summary | ELECTION" of
program CWDEMCB2 | Tab to the number or command Enter to |
| process it. |
| CF450QCV End=PF03 More... |
-------------------------------------------
The program was compiled on 28MAY2003 at 11:11:29 and is 002020 bytes long.
It is part of load module CWDEMCB2 which was loaded from
Viewing the Abend-AID for CICS Report Directory

The Abend-AID for CICS interface allows an Xpediter/CICS user to access any Abend-AID
for CICS report. The Abend-AID for CICS Directory screen contains a list of available
reports.
1. To return to the Abend-AID for CICS Interface Menu (7), press PF4 until you are
returned to Xpediter/CICS. The menu appears as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8. Abend-AID for CICS Interface Menu (7)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - ABEND-AID FOR CICS INTERFACE (7) ----------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ********* ABEND-AID FOR CICS PROCESSING COMPLETED *********

1 SNAP DUMP - Issue Abend-AID for CICS snap dump
2 REPORT DIRECTORY - Display Abend-AID for CICS report directory
3 DIAGNOSTICS - Display Abend-AID for CICS abend code diagnostic text
2. To select the directory, type 2 in the COMMAND field.

3. Press Enter to display the Abend-AID for CICS Directory screen (Figure 9-9).
This screen displays all abend reports generated for this CICS region. Reports can be
selected by entering an S to the left of the Entry column next to the desired report.
Note: Your Abend-AID for CICS Directory screen display will differ from the one shown
here because abend activity varies from one CICS region to another.
Figure 9-9. Abend-AID for CICS Directory Screen
Abend-AID for CICS --- Abend-AID for CICS Directory --- Row 000001 of 000002
FDBRC2100I User MYUSRID successfully logged on
M Menu L Lock H Dup History R Recall T Terminate Analysis
S Diag U Unlock I Information E Migrate C Change Priority
D Delete G Messages A Analyze P Print N Contact Information

Entry Job Name Code Tran Date Time Program Offset Dups Status
******* ******** ****** **** ********* ***** ******** ****** **** *******
0000005 ACMEC123 AEIM XCB2 12AUG2003 08:19 CWDEMCB2 0014F2 0 COMPLET
0000004 ACMEC123 ASRA XCB2 12AUG2003 08:06 CWDEMCB2 001134 0 COMPLET
**************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

Type a line command and press Enter to process it
CF450QCV AssistMenu=PF24
Viewing the Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostics

The Abend-AID for CICS interface provides additional diagnostics to help solve abends.
1. To return to the Abend-AID for CICS Interface Menu (7), press PF3. The menu
appears, and you are now back in Xpediter/CICS.
2. To view the diagnostic messages, type 3 in the COMMAND field.
3. Press Enter to display the Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostic Information screen (Figure
9-10).
Figure 9-10. Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostic Information Screen
Abend-AID for CICS ------ Diagnostic Information ------ Row 000001 of 000009

The transaction was terminated with the AEIM abend because the exceptional
condition NOTFND occurred for which there was no 'EXEC CICS HANDLE
CONDITION' request active.

Either change the application program to prevent the condition recurring, or
to handle the condition using the "EXEC CICS HANDLE CONDITION' command. If
necessary, use the contents of the EIBRCODE field in the EIB or information
from the CICS trace table to assist in determining the cause of the
exception condition.
Since an AEIM abend was the last abend to occur, this screen automatically displays
the diagnostics for an AEIM. The diagnostics for all CICS abend codes can be
displayed from this screen.
4. To display more information for an AEIM abend, tab to the highlighted AEIM abend
code and press Enter. The IBM Message Text screen shown in Figure 9-11 on page 9-7
will be displayed.
Figure 9-11. Abend-AID for CICS IBM Message Text Screen
Abend-AID for CICS --------- IBM Message Text --------- Row 000001 of 000011

AEIM

Explanation:

NOTFND condition not handled.

This is one of a number of abends issued by the EXEC interface
program. Because of their similar characteristics these abends are
described as a group.

See the description of abend AEIA for further details.

CF450QCV AssistMenu=PF24
5. Press PF3 twice to return to Xpediter/CICS. The Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostics
screen (7) will be displayed as shown in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12. Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostics Screen (7)
-------------- XPEDITER/CICS - ABEND-AID FOR CICS DIAGNOSTICS (7) ---------C123

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ********* ABEND-AID FOR CICS PROCESSING COMPLETED *********
ABEND CODE: AEIM "NOTFND" RECORD NOT FOUND
6. To see another diagnostic message, type ASRA in the ABEND CODE field.
7. Press Enter. The Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostic Information screen appears as shown
in Figure 9-13, with the explanation of an ASRA abend.

Figure 9-13. Abend-AID for CICS Diagnostic Information Screen for an ASRA Abend
Abend-AID for CICS ------ Diagnostic Information ------ Row 000001 of 000059
FDBRC2100I User MYUSRID successfully logged on
The transaction was terminated with the ASRA abend because the CICS system
recovery detected a program check. This may occur for any of the following
reasons.

The invalid operation code exception occurs when the operation code of the
instruction to be executed is not a valid code or not available on the CPU
that the program is running on.

The priviledged operation exception normally occurs by executing a
priviledged instruction while the program is executing in problem state.
This is usually a symptom of another error.

The execute exception normally occurs by executing an "EXECUTE" instruction
by means of another "EXECUTE" instruction. This is usually a symptom of
another error.

The protection exception occurs when the storage protect key of an operand,
instruction, or data does not match the program's protection key. This
normally occurs by executing an instruction that either references or
resides at an illegal storage location. See also the notes on the
CF450QCV AssistMenu=PF24 More...
10-1
Chapter 10.
Using Automatic Trap Activation Chap 10
This chapter demonstrates Xpediters Automatic Trap Activation (ATA) feature. ATA traps
terminal-related transaction abendsbut not breakpointswithout the user having an
Xpediter session running.
Enabling the ATA feature is optional and is done with the ATA global table parameter.
With the parameter set to OFF (the default), ATA is deactivated. Setting the parameter to
XPED, XPRT, or XPSP activates Automatic Trap Activation.
With ATA activated, if a terminal-related transaction is about to abend, the abend will be
trapped and Xpediter will be invoked on the terminal or 3270 Web Bridge session where
the transaction was initiated. The transaction used to invoke Xpediter is determined by
the value of the ATA global parameter. If the ATASCREEN global parameter is set to YES, a
customizable notification/decision screen will first be displayed. If the user decides to
debug the abending transaction, the Source Listing (2.L), Break/Abend (2.1), or Assembler
Break/Abend (2.20) screen will be displayed, depending on the transaction specified for
the ATA parameter and the availability of program source.
Trapping an Abend with ATA

In the following demonstration, the global parameter ATA has been set to XPED,
ATASCREEN has been set to YES, and source is available for program CWDEMCB2.
Note: For the purpose of properly demonstrating Automatic Trap Activationbut not
for regular Xpediter/CICS useyou will first make sure Xpediter is not active on
the terminal being used.
1. On a blank CICS screen, type XPND and press Enter. A message will be displayed
saying either Xpediter is not active or it has been terminated.
2. On a blank CICS screen, type XCB2 and press Enter. The Demonstration Transaction
screen shown in Figure 10-1 will be displayed.


3. To cause an ASRA abend, type 00001 and press Enter. The Automatic Trap Activation
screen (Figure 10-2 on page 10-2) will be displayed. Pressing Clear will allow the
transaction abend to occur, while pressing Enter will display the appropriate
Xpediter screen for debugging the transaction.
Figure 10-2. Automatic Trap Activation Screen
-------------------------- AUTOMATIC TRAP ACTIVATION ----------------------C123

COMMAND ===>

* * * XPEDITER/CICS AUTOMATIC TRAP ACTIVATION - BULLETIN * * *

AN ABEND HAS BEEN AUTOMATICALLY TRAPPED AT THIS TERMINAL

PRESS THE ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE DEBUGGING THIS TRANSACTION

OR PRESS THE CLEAR KEY TO ABEND THE TRANSACTION

This portion of the screen can be set up

to present customer-specific information

using global parameters ATAUSR1, ATAUSR2, and ATAUSR3

FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TYPE HELP.
4. Press Enter. The Source Listing screen (2.L) will be displayed with the source of
program CWDEMCB2 positioned to the instruction at which the abend occurred.
At this point, the user would debug the abending transaction as described in Testing
without Breakpoints on page 3-1.
11-1
Chapter 11.
Setting Up a Profile Chap 11
Xpediter/CICS allows you to have an individual user profile to customize your debugging
session for your needs and preferences. A profile is a set of default values that you have
specified and stored for your own use. This chapter discusses how to set up your own
profile.
When you use Xpediter/CICS, the system will recognize your userID and will call up your
profile. Then when you work with fields and actions that have defaults, Xpediter/CICS
will use defaults from your profile instead of those furnished by Xpediter itself.
1. Start Xpediter/CICS by entering XPED on a blank CICS screen.

2. To access the Session Profile Menu (0), type 0 in the COMMAND field of the Primary
Menu.
3. Press Enter to display the Session Profile Menu (0) as shown in Figure 11-1.
Note: Menu option 6 SCRIPT DSN is not displayed if global parameter XDSCRPT is set to
NO. The default is YES.
Figure 11-1. Session Profile Menu (0)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SESSION PROFILE MENU (0) --------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

1 DEFAULTS - Set profile default values
2 KEYS - Set profile PF key default values
3 TRANSLATE TABLE - Set profile Output Translate Table values
4 LOAD PROFILE - Load default values from another profile
5 SAVE PROFILE - Save profile default values immediately
6 SCRIPT DSN - Script Dataset allocation values
Changing Profile Defaults

1. To access the Set Profile Defaults screen (0.1), type =0.1 in the COMMAND field of
any Xpediter/CICS screen.
2. Press Enter to display the Set Profile Defaults screen (0.1) (Figure 11-2). The Set
Profile Defaults screen (0.1) controls environmental features, such as scroll values
and the type of information that Xpediter/CICS displays on the bottom of the screen.
This is a two-page screen. The second page is accessed by scrolling forward (PF8)
(Figure 11-3).
Note: Certain settings may be overridden or non-applicable when using Xpediter in one
of the three restricted modes. For more information, see the Xpediter/CICS
Reference Manual.
Figure 11-2. Set Profile Defaults Screen 1

MODULE: CSECT:

PROFILE ===> ABCDEFG Current profile name
DESCRIPTION ==>

DEBUGGING OPTIONS:
FOOT ===> OFF (ANALYZE/DATA/KEYS/MENU/REGS/FLOAT/SOURCE/STATUS/OFF)
DELAY ===> 0 (0-20) Set default wait intervals for stepping
TRACE ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Trace program execution in the background
PROTECT ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Intercept all storage violations
MAXSTEP ===> 20 (1-99) Set default maximum value for execution
REGISTERS ===> 64 (32/64) Register format, if z/Architecture active

TRAP OPTIONS:
TRAP ===> ON (ON/OFF) Intercept all abends
SAVE TRAPS ===> ON (ON/OFF) Save traps automatically at session end
LOAD TRAPS ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Load saved traps at session start

SOURCE OPTIONS:
SOURCE ===> ON (ON/OFF) Show source display at entry
JUSTIFY ===> ON (ON/OFF) Display the source segment of listing
OPTWARN ===> ON (ON/OFF) Program optimized warning message
Figure 11-3. Set Profile Defaults Screen 2

MODULE: CSECT:

KEEP OPTIONS:
KEEP ===> 5 (0/3-11/OFF) Open/close the KEEP window
AUTOKEEP ===> ON (ON/OFF) Show automatic keeps
IKEEP ===> ON (ON/OFF) Intellikeeps (Intelligent Autokeeps)
WIDEHEX ===> NO (YES/NO) Use entire lines to show HEX data

TERMINAL OPTIONS:
ALT ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Set alternate screen size
OPT ===> ON (ON/OFF) Enable 3270 data stream optimizer
ALARM ===> ON (ON/OFF) Enable terminal alarm at error
DELIM ===> ; (;/delim) Command Delimiter (Default: semi-colon)
CMDSIZE ===> 1 (1/2/3) Number of COMMAND input lines
TRANSLATE ===> OFF (ON/OFF) Use profile-level output translate table

For the 1st CSECT entry below, specify ALL or NONE. Otherwise, enter all
csect-names (max 6) that are to be automatically selected.
CSECT 1 ===> NONE CSECT 2 ===> ________________
CSECT 3 ===> ________________ CSECT 4 ===> ________________
CSECT 5 ===> ________________ CSECT 6 ===> ________________
***END***
3. To change a default option, overtype the current value with the new value in the
appropriate field.
4. Press Enter. The Set Profile Defaults screen (0.1) is updated to show the new value.
Changing PF Key Settings

You can change the PF key functions and labels to suit your needs.
1. To access the PF key setting screen (0.2), type =0.2 in the COMMAND field of any
Xpediter/CICS screen.
2. Press Enter to display the Primary PF Key Settings screen (0.2) (Figure 11-4). On this
screen you can modify settings for PF1 through PF12.
Setting Up a Profile 11-3
Figure 11-4. Primary PF Key Settings Screen (0.2)
---------------- XPEDITER/CICS - PRIMARY PF KEY SETTINGS (0.2) ------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

VALUE LABEL
PF1 ====> HELP ====> HELP
PF2 ====> RUNTO CSR ====> RUNTO
PF3 ====> END ====> END
PF4 ====> =X ====> EXIT
PF5 ====> RFIND ====> RFIND
PF6 ====> LOCATE * ====> LOCATE *
PF7 ====> UP ====> UP
PF8 ====> DOWN ====> DOWN
PF9 ====> GO 1 ====> GO 1
PF10 ====> LEFT ====> LEFT
PF11 ====> RIGHT ====> RIGHT
PF12 ====> GO ====> GO

Press ENTER to display alternate keys. Enter END command to exit.
3. Press Enter to update PF1 through PF12 and display PF13 through PF24. The
Alternate PF Key Settings screen (0.2) appears as shown in Figure 11-5. On this screen
you can modify settings for PF13 through PF24.
4. Press Enter to update PF13 through PF24 and redisplay the Primary PF Key Settings
screen (0.2).
5. To change the function of PF9, type GO 5 in the VALUE field next to PF9.
6. To change the label for PF9, type GO 5 in the LABEL field next to PF9. Press Enter.
Figure 11-5. Alternate PF Key Settings Screen (0.2)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - ALTERNATE PF KEY SETTINGS (0.2) -----------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

VALUE LABEL
PF13 ====> MENU ====> MENU
PF14 ====> MEMORY ====> MEMORY
PF15 ====> SELECT ====> SELECT
PF16 ====> WS ====> WS
PF17 ====> =2.4 ====> TRACE
PF18 ====> =2.8 ====> LAST3270
PF19 ====> UP MAX ====> UP MAX
PF20 ====> DOWN MAX ====> DOWN MAX
PF21 ====> FILE ====> FILE
PF22 ====> DLEFT ====> DLEFT
PF23 ====> DRIGHT ====> DRIGHT
PF24 ====> RETRIEVE ====> RETRIEVE

Press ENTER to display primary keys. Enter END command to exit.
The default PF key values can also be changed using the KEYS primary command from
any screen.
Note: The values in the LABEL column also appear on the PF key buttons displayed
when using Xpediters 3270 Web Bridge support.
Changing Output Translate Table Values

The Output Translate Table can be used to allow the display of non-English characters
when your terminal's codepage is not supported by the Xpediter/CICS global NLS
parameter. It is also useful when there is a mismatch between a listing's codepage and
your terminal codepage. The following example shows how C-language programmers can
display open and close brackets within a listing that was compiled with codepage 1047,
when their terminal codepage is 037. We will change the listing's bracket positions in
this table (x'AD' and x'BD' for IBM-1047 codepage) to the bracket values of your
terminal's codepage (x'BA' and x'BB', for IBM-037 codepage, respectively).
1. Start with a display of our C-language demo program CWDEMC on the 2.L screen.
Type UP MAX on the command line and press Enter. Type FIND eibtime on the
command line, and press Enter. Eibtime has left and right brackets on it. Note that
those brackets don't display as brackets on your terminal.
Figure 11-6. Xpediter/CICS - Source Listing Screen (2.L)

MODULE: CWDEMC CSECT: CWDEMC COMPILED: 11 OCT 2007 - 16:33:29
------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000063 | typedef struct {
000064 | unsigned char eibtime 4 ;
000065 | unsigned char eibdate 4 ;
000066 | unsigned char eibtrnid 4 ;
000067 | unsigned char eibtaskn 4 ;
000068 | unsigned char eibtrmid 4 ;
000069 | signed short int eibfil01 ;
000070 | signed short int eibcposn ;
000071 | signed short int eibcalen ;
000072 | unsigned char eibaid ;
000073 | unsigned char eibfn 2 ;
000074 | unsigned char eibrcode 6 ;
000075 | unsigned char eibds 8 ;
000076 | unsigned char eibreqid 8 ;
000077 | unsigned char eibrsrce 8 ;
------------------------------- P F K E Y S -------------------------------
F1 =HELP F2 =RUNTO F3 =END F4 =EXIT F5 =RFIND F6 =LOCATE *
F7 =UP F8 =DOWN F9 =GO 1 F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=GO
F13=MENU F14=MEMORY F15=SELECT F16=WS F17=TRACE F18=LAST3270
F19=UP MAX F20=DOWN MAX F21=FILE F22=DLEFT F23=DRIGHT F24=RETRIEVE
2. Type =0.3 on the command line to go to the Output Translate Table. Go to the "AD"
vertical hex spot found on the X80-XBF line, overtype the A (found on the top line)
with a B, and the D (on the bottom line) with an A and press Enter. You have now
replaced the X'AD' with X'BA'.
3. Go to the "BD" vertical hex spot also found on the X80-XBF line and leave the B (top
line) as is, and overtype the D (bottom line) with a B and press Enter. You have now
replaced the X'BD' with X'BB'.
Setting Up a Profile 11-5
Figure 11-7. Xpediter/CICS - Output Translate Table Screen (0.3) after changing X'AD' and X'BD'
----------------- XPEDITER/CICS - OUTPUT TRANSLATE TABLE (0.3) ------------C123

COMMAND ===>

................ ................ ................ ................
X00 - X3F 4444444444444444 4444444444444444 4444444444444444 4444444444444444
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

.<(+| &!$*); -/,%_>? `:#@'="
X40 - X7F 4444444444444444 5555555555555555 6666666666666666 7777777777777777
0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF

Ruler: 0...4...8...C... 0...4...8...C... 0...4...8...C... 0...4...8...C...

abcdefghi jklmnopqr ~stuvwxyz[ ^[]]
X80 - XBF 8888888888888888 9999999999999999 AAAAAAAAAAAAABAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCAEF 0123456789ABCBEF

{ABCDEFGHI- }JKLMNOPQR \STUVWXYZ 0123456789.
XC0 - XFF CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4
0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEF 0123456789ABCDEB

4. Return to the Source Listing screen (2.L) to see your changes. If you aren't still
positioned on the eibtime field, repeat the UP MAX and FIND eibtime commands.
You should now see the brackets display as brackets.
Figure 11-8. Xpediter/CICS - Source Listing Screen (2.L) with display brackets

------ --------------------------------------------------------------------->
000063 | typedef struct {
000064 | unsigned char eibtime [4] ;
000065 | unsigned char eibdate [4] ;
000066 | unsigned char eibtrnid [4] ;
000067 | unsigned char eibtaskn [4] ;
000068 | unsigned char eibtrmid [4] ;
000069 | signed short int eibfil01 ;
000070 | signed short int eibcposn ;
000071 | signed short int eibcalen ;
000072 | unsigned char eibaid ;
000073 | unsigned char eibfn [2] ;
000074 | unsigned char eibrcode [6] ;
000075 | unsigned char eibds [8] ;
000076 | unsigned char eibreqid [8] ;
000077 | unsigned char eibrsrce [8] ;
------------------------------- P F K E Y S -------------------------------
Loading a Profile
Once a profile is created, it can be loaded whenever XPED is entered. To load a profile,
enter XPED P = profile from a blank CICS screen, where profile equals the profile name.
For example, to load ALTKEYS, enter XPED P=ALTKEYS.
An alternate profile can be loaded at any time by accessing the Load Profile screen (0.4)
(Figure 11-9).
The current profile name can be changed via the SELECT line command on the Load
Profile (0.4) screen or by accessing the Set Profile Defaults screen (0.1) and over-typing
the profile name.
Note: If user ID is used to sign onto the CICS region, a profile for the user ID is
automatically created. If the P= option for specifying a profile is not used when
the Xpediter/CICS session is initiated, the profile for the user ID is automatically
loaded and used.
Figure 11-9. Load Profile Screen (0.4)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - LOAD PROFILE (0.4) -----------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001
CURRENT PROFILE: AJMTRACE.ACMEJET0 DISPLAY MASK ==> ******** ACMEJET0
LINE COMMANDS: S (Select) C (Copy) D (Delete) R (Rename)

CMD NAME OWNER NEWNAME DESCRIPTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ AFHHOS0 ACMEJET0 ________ ____________________________________________
_ AJMCSECT ACMEJET0 ________ Profile 1
_ AJMNONE ACMEJET0 ________ Profile 2
_ AJMTRACE ACMEJET0 ________ Profile 3
_ AUTOSEL ACMEJET0 ________ ____________________________________________
**END**
Saving Profile Defaults

1. To save the new profile, type =0.5 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display
the Save Profile screen (0.5) (Figure 11-10).
Figure 11-10. Save Profile Screen (0.5)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - SAVE PROFILE (0.5) -----------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

SAVE DEFAULT VALUES TO PROFILE ===>

To save the current profile, specify the profile name and press ENTER.
2. Type ALTKEYS (or any new profile name) in the PROFILE NAME field.
3. Press Enter. Xpediter/CICS displays the message:
*********** PROFILE HAS BEEN UPDATED ***********
next to the MODULE field to show that the new profile has been saved.
12-1
Chapter 12.
Accessing Files Chap 12
This chapter introduces the Xpediter/CICS file utility, which displays lists of resources
that you can access under CICS, including VSAM and BDAM datasets, DL/1 databases,
DB2 data, transient data, temporary storage queues, and MQ queues. Choose the resource
you want to access from these lists and perform any of the displayed service requests.
Once a resource is selected, Xpediter/CICS displays the records in that resource. You can
then add, delete, or modify the records. Security is available to restrict update and delete
access. To provide audit capabilities, Xpediters Log Facility gives sites the option of
logging all changes made to supported resources. For more information, refer to the
Xpediter/CICS Installation and Configuration Guide.
This chapter shows how to browse records in a file and change file service requests.
During these exercises, you will resolve two abends, AEIM and AEIP, that can occur when
working with VSAM files.

Browsing Records in a File

1. Start Xpediter/CICS by entering XPED on a blank CICS screen and pressing Enter.
2. Press Clear to return to CICS.
3. Start the transaction by typing XCB2 in the top left corner of a blank CICS screen.
4. Press Enter to display the Demonstration Transaction screen.
5. Type 00002 to cause an AEIM abend.
6. Press Enter. Xpediter/CICS intercepts an AEIM abend and displays the Source Listing
screen (2.L) (Figure 12-1).
Look at the data in the keep window. This program is attempting to find record
00002 (EMP-NUM-KEY) in the DBUGEMP file. You can check the DBUGEMP file to
see if that record is in the file.
Figure 12-1. Record Not Found Message on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

**END**
000438 END-EXEC.
000439
000442
7. Type FILE in the COMMAND field to transfer to the File Utility.

8. Press Enter to display the File Utility Menu (5) (Figure 12-2).
Figure 12-2. File Utility Menu (5)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - FILE UTILITY MENU (5) ----------------C123

COMMAND ===>

1 CICS DATASETS - Access CICS datasets
2 TEMPORARY STORAGE - Access CICS temporary storage
3 TRANSIENT DATA - Access CICS transient data queues
4 DL/1 DATABASES - Access DL/1 databases
5 DB2 EASY QUERY - Access DB2 tables
6 MQ QUEUES - Access WebSphere MQ (MQSeries) queues
The File Utility Menu (5) lists the types of resources that can be accessed through the
file utility. Because the DBUGEMP dataset (the demonstration employee file) is a
VSAM file, you will access it with the CICS DATASETS option.
9. Type 1 in the COMMAND field.
10. Press Enter to display the CICS Datasets Menu (5.1) (Figure 12-3), which lists the
functions that you can perform on a dataset.
Figure 12-3. CICS Dataset Menu (5.1)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - CICS DATASETS MENU (5.1) --------------C123

COMMAND ===>

1 DATASET LIST - List all datasets defined to CICS
2 BROWSE - Browse multiple records in a dataset
3 EDIT - Edit a single record in a dataset
11. Type 1 in the COMMAND field to display a list of available datasets.

Accessing Files 12-3
12. Press Enter to display the CICS Dataset List screen (5.1.1) (Figure 12-4).
Note: The datasets displayed on your screen differ from the ones shown in this
example. Xpediter/CICS lists all of the files in the file resources defined for
your CICS region.
Figure 12-4. CICS Dataset List Screen (5.1.1)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - CICS DATASET LIST (5.1.1) --------------C123


LINE COMMANDS: B (Browse) S (Select)

ACCESS CURRENT SERVICE REMOTE
CMD NAME METHOD TYPE STATUS REQUESTS OPTIONS ID NAME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ DBUGEMP VSAM KSDS OPE ENA REA BRO SHR
_ DBUGPRF VSAM KSDS OPE ENA REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ DBUGSQL VSAM CLO UNE REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ DFHCMACD VSAM CLO ENA REA SHR
_ DFHCSD VSAM CLO UNE REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ SLSF001 VSAM RRDS OPE ENA REA BRO SHR
_ SLSF003 VSAM CLO UNE REA BRO SHR
_ TESTFLE1 VSAM CLO ENA REA BRO SHR
**END**
The CICS Dataset List screen (5.1.1) lists the datasets that you can access from this
CICS region as defined in the file resources. In addition to the dataset name, the
screen displays the access method, current status, and allowed service requests.
Use PF7 and PF8 to scroll up and down through the list. Use the LOCATE command
to find a particular dataset. Valid line commands are B (Browse) and S (Select). The B
command displays a list of the records in the dataset. The S command displays the
Edit CICS Dataset Record screen (5.1.3), where you can enter a record key.
13. Type B to the left of the DBUGEMP dataset and press Enter to display the Browse
CICS Dataset screen (5.1.2) (Figure 12-5).
Figure 12-5. Browse CICS Dataset Screen (5.1.2)
----------------- XPEDITER/CICS - BROWSE CICS DATASET (5.1.2) -------------C123


ACCESS METHOD: VSAM TYPE: KSDS
FILENAME: DBUGEMP MAX RECLN: 00080
RECFM: F KEYLN: 00005 RKP: 00000
KEY FIELD: ----5
00010
FFFFF
00010

LINE COMMANDS: S (Select)

CMD RECLN ----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+-->
_ 00080 00010EMPLOYEE #10 010
_ 00080 00020EMPLOYEE #20 020
_ 00080 00030EMPLOYEE #30 030
_ 00080 00040EMPLOYEE #40 040
_ 00080 00050EMPLOYEE #50 050
*END*
This screen displays a list of all records in the selected dataset. You can display the
records in hexadecimal or character format. You can also scroll through the list and
use the FIND command to find a particular string.
File information is shown at the top of the screen. The example shows that
DBUGEMP is a key sequenced dataset (KSDS), with fixed records (RECFM: F) that
have a key length (KEYLN) of 5. The relative key position (RKP) is 0, with a maximum
record length (MAX RECLN) of 80.
The KEY FIELD area shows the key of the record positioned at the top of the list. To
position to another record, enter its key in the KEY FIELD.
The record information is displayed in character format. You can select individual
records for update by typing an S next to the record and pressing Enter. You can also
map records to a COBOL copybook or data structure to display the field values next
to their data names.
14. Type S to the left of the first record and press Enter to display the Edit CICS Dataset
Record screen (5.1.3).
15. Type USING VSAM-EMP-RECORD in the COMMAND field. VSAM-EMP-RECORD is
the COBOL 01 level that defines the DBUGEMP file in CWDEMCB2 (Figure 12-6).
16. Press Enter to map the data in this record to the data structure VSAM-EMP-RECORD.
Notice the VALID COMMANDS field displays the commands that can be issued for
this file. Any of these commands can be entered in the COMMAND field. You can
browse through the file by using the NEXT command to move to the next record.
Figure 12-6. Edit CICS Dataset Record Screen (5.1.3)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - EDIT CICS DATASET RECORD (5.1.3) ----------C123

VALID COMMANDS: READ NEXT PREV CLOSE
ACCESS METHOD: VSAM TYPE: KSDS
FILENAME: DBUGEMP RECLN: 00080 MAX RECLN: 00080
DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ RECFM: F KEYLN: 00005 RKP: 00000
KEY FIELD: ----5
00010
FFFFF
00010

FIELD LEVEL/NAME PICTURE ----+---10----+---20----+---3>
01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD GROUP
02 EMP-NAME X(15) EMPLOYEE #10
02 EMP-HOURS 999 010
02 EMP-TOTPAY 9(5)V99
02 FILLER X(50)
**END**
17. Type NEXT in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the next record in the
file.
Look at EMP-NUM-KEY of the displayed record. Our example program abended
because there were no records on the DBUGEMP file with the key 00002 (Figure 12-1
on page 12-2). However, there is a record with the key 00020.
18. Press PF6 (LOCATE *) to return to the Source Listing screen (2.L) to change the key.
19. Type 00020 in the data area of the field EMP-NUM-KEY as shown in Figure 12-7.
20. Press Enter to update the field.
21. Press PF12 (GO) to continue processing.
Figure 12-7. Modifying Key Data on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

**END**
000438 END-EXEC.
000439
000442
Changing File Service Requests

In this example, Xpediter/CICS intercepts an AEIP abend in the CWDEMCB2 program.
An AEIP abend can be caused by many different problems. In this example, the last EXEC
CICS command was a READ for UPDATE, as shown in lines 454 through 460 in Figure 12-
8.
Figure 12-8. AEIP Abend on the Source Listing Screen (2.L)

01 VSAM-EMP-RECORD GROUP 00020EMPLOYEE #20 0200
**END**
------ ------------------- AEIP ("INVREQ" INVALID REQUEST) at CWDEMCB2.454 ->
000451 ADD EMP-TOTPAY TO EMP-TOTPAY-TBL (EMP-TBL-SUB).
000452
000453 ** READ VSAM FILE FOR UPDATE AND THEN REWRITE THE RECORD....
000459 UPDATE
000460 END-EXEC.
000461 MOVE EMP-TOTPAY-TBL (EMP-TBL-SUB) TO EMP-TOTPAY.
000462 EXEC CICS REWRITE DATASET ('DBUGEMP')
000463 FROM (VSAM-EMP-RECORD)
1. Type =5.1.1 in the COMMAND field to check the service requests for DBUGEMP.
2. Press Enter. Xpediter/CICS transfers directly to the CICS Datasets List screen (5.1.1)
(Figure 12-9).
Figure 12-9. CICS Dataset List Screen (5.1.1)



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ DBUGEMP VSAM KSDS OPE ENA REA BRO SHR
_ DBUGPRF VSAM KSDS OPE ENA REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ DBUGSQL VSAM CLO UNE REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ DFHCMACD VSAM CLO ENA REA SHR
_ DFHCSD VSAM CLO UNE REA UPD ADD BRO DEL SHR
_ SLSF003 VSAM CLO UNE REA BRO SHR
**END**
Look at the SERVICE REQUESTS field for DBUGEMP. Both read (REA) and browse
(BRO) are specified for this file. There is no update (UPD) capability, so the read for
update in CWDEMCB2 resulted in an INVALID REQUEST (AEIP) abend.
Authorized users can modify the current status and add or delete service requests
(ADD, DELETE, BROWSE, UPDATE, or READ). To change the service request, you
must first close and disable the dataset.
3. Type CLO in the CURRENT STATUS field for DBUGEMP.

4. Press Enter. As shown in Figure 12-10, the message CLOSED appears in the REMOTE
field to indicate that the file has been closed. The CURRENT STATUS changes from
OPE ENA to CLO UNE.
Figure 12-10. CLOSED Message



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ DBUGEMP VSAM CLO UNE REA BRO SHR CLOSED
5. Type UPD in the SERVICE REQUESTS field next to REA.

6. Press Enter. Figure 12-11 shows that the message UPDATE ENABLED appears in the
REMOTE field, indicating that update capabilities have been added.
Note: This change is temporary and remains in effect until the region is recycled.
You must update the file definition to make the change permanent.
Figure 12-11. UPDATE ENABLED Message



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ DBUGEMP VSAM CLO UNE REA UPD BRO SHR UPDATE ENABLED
7. Type OPE in the CURRENT STATUS field to open the file.

8. Press Enter. The message OPEN is displayed in the REMOTE field to indicate that the
file is open. The CURRENT STATUS changes from CLO UNE to OPE ENA.
9. Press PF12 (GO) to continue processing the transaction. The XCB2 Transaction
Complete screen appears as shown in Figure 12-12.
Remember to end your session as described in Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a

Figure 12-12. Transaction Complete Screen


EMPLOYEE NAME: EMPLOYEE #20
HOURS WORKED: 020
HOURLY RATE: 10.00
GROSS PAY: 200.00

13-1
Chapter 13.
Accessing DL/1 Databases Chap 13
This chapter discusses how to use the Xpediter/CICS File Utility to access and modify IMS
databases defined to your CICS region and/or the DBCTL region to which your CICS
region is attached.
Note: A sample Compuware database was used to generate the screens shown in this
chapter. Since the database you access will be different, your screens will vary
from those shown. Use this chapter simply as a model of how to access your
database.

Selecting PSBs and PCBs

1. From a blank CICS screen, type XPED 5.4 and press Enter to display the DL/1
Database Menu (5.4) as shown in Figure 13-1.
2. Type 1 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the DL/1 PSB List screen
(Figure 13-2), which lists the PSBs defined for use in this CICS region and the DBCTL
region to which your CICS region is attached.
Xpediter/CICS always presents a list of PSBs from which you can select, so you no
longer have to supply complicated syntax to access the PSB. You just select the PSB
that you want to work with.
Figure 13-1. DL/1 Database Menu (5.4)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DL/1 DATABASE MENU (5.4) --------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

1 PSB LIST - List all PSBs defined to CICS and/or DBCTL
2 PCB LIST - List all PCBs defined in a PSB
3 SEGMENT LIST - List all segments accessible by a PCB
4 EDIT - Edit a single segment
Note that remote PSBs are shown first, listed with the remote system ID and the
remote PSB name. Those remote PSBs are display-only and cannot be accessed from
the File Utility. They are followed by DBCTL PSBs.
Figure 13-2. DL/1 PSB List Screen (5.4.1)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DL/1 PSB LIST (5.4.1) ----------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
DBCTL STATUS: CONNECTED ID: R710

REMOTE
SEL PSBNAME SYSID PSBNAME TYPE STATUS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
PSBTEST C024 PSBREMOT REMOTE
_ DFHSAM04 DBCTL
AABMP001 DBCTL PSB STOPPED
_ AABMP002 DBCTL
_ AABMP003 DBCTL
_ AABMP004 DBCTL
_ ADSIM001 DBCTL
ADSIM002 DBCTL PSB INIT. FAILED
ADSIM003 DBCTL PSB INIT. FAILED
3. Type S in the SEL field next to the desired PSB name and press Enter to display a list
of PCBs in the selected PSB. The DL/1 PCB List screen (5.4.2) (Figure 13-3) appears.
Figure 13-3. DL/1 PCB List Screen (5.4.2)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DL/1 PCB LIST (5.4.2) ----------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

PSBNAME: DFHSAM04 (DBCTL)

SEL PCB# DBD
----------------------
_ 1 DI21PART
**END**
A database description (DBD) is associated with a PCB and assigned a number which
is displayed prior to the DBD name on this screen. This number is used in place of
the DBD name, because multiple PCBs can access the same DBD using the same or
slightly different views of the database. The PCB list is displayed in the order in
which the PCBs have been defined in the PSB. You can scroll through this screen (UP,
DOWN, TOP, BOTTOM), or you can position the cursor to a particular PCB using the
LOCATE command followed by the DBD name.
Selecting Segments from the PCB

1. Type an S next to the selected PCB on the DL/1 PCB List screen, and press Enter to
display the DL/1 Segment List screen (5.4.3) (Figure 13-4).
Accessing DL/1 Databases 13-3
Figure 13-4. DL/1 Segment List Screen (5.4.3)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DL/1 SEGMENT LIST (5.4.3) --------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

PSBNAME: DFHSAM04 (DBCTL) PCB#: 01 DBD: DI21PART

SEL LEVEL SEGMENT NAME
--- ---------------- ------------------------
_ 01 PARTROOT
_ 02 STANINFO
_ 02 STOKSTAT
_ 03 CYCCOUNT
_ 03 BACKORDR
**END**
This screen displays each segment that can be accessed via the selected PCB, along
with the associated level number for that segment. Each level in the hierarchy is
indented one position from the previous higher level to provide a hierarchical view
of the database.
The P line command highlights the hierarchical path required to reach a specific
segment.
2. Type a P command in the SEL field next to the lowest level segment to be accessed.
Press Enter to highlight the path indicating how the segment must be accessed
within the hierarchy.
Note: The PSBNAME and PCB# fields on this screen can be used to directly access a
segment list by typing the PSBNAME with a PCB number. Xpediter/CICS
checks the PSB and PCB number and returns an error message when they are
invalid.
3. Type an S in the SEL field next to a segment in this list and press Enter to display the
Edit DL/1 Segment screen (5.4.4) shown in Figure 13-5.
4. Type SHOW SSA in the COMMAND field and press Enter. Xpediter/CICS creates a
skeleton segment search argument (SSA).
Figure 13-5. Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - EDIT DL/1 SEGMENT (5.4.4) --------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

COMMANDS: PCB
SHOW SSA/DATA/KEYS HEX OFF/ON/DUMP INSERT REM END/TERM=COMMIT XFER=CANCEL
PSB NAME: DFHSAM04 (DBCTL) PCB#: 01 DBD: DI21PART RECLN: 00000 MAX RECLN: 00000
DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ RECFM: ** PSB IS NOT SCHEDULED **
DATABASE STAT PROC SEGMENT KFD ---------------KEY FEEDBACK--------------
NAME LV CODE OPTS NAME LEN **** NO PCB AVAILABLE ****

SSA 01 OF 01 --------------------SEARCH KEY------------------
LV SEG NAME CC Q SEGFLD OP ----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+-->
01 PARTROOT *--- ( PARTKEY = .................)
000000000000000005
00000000000000000D

** **END**
This screen is used to perform DL/1 calls to the database. Xpediter/CICS uses
standard DL/1 notation rules to perform calls. READ and WRITE commands are not
used. Xpediter/CICS can build skeleton SSAs to access a segment or rebuild complete
SSAs displaying the path to the segment. You can perform sequential and random
calls to a database using PCB and TERM calls. A PSB holds the position in the
database for up to two minutes. That time is the default value of the global parameter
PSBWAIT and can be changed by specifying another value between 1 and 59.
The screen also shows the valid commands that are specified in the PCB definition.
The commands indicate the functions that can be used with DL/1 segments, I/O area
manipulation, and screen display. If NONE shows in the VALID COMMANDS area,
either Xpediter/CICS cannot determine the valid DL/1 commands or you are not
authorized to perform functions on this screen.
In this example, no PSB has been scheduled. The next example shows how to
schedule a PSB and retrieve a DL/1 segment.
Retrieving a DL/1 Segment

A qualification statement provides DL/1 with information about a specific segment
occurrence. You provide DL/1 with the name of a field in the segment and a value for the
specific field. The field and value are connected by a relational operator (OP) that tells
DL/1 how to compare the two values.
1. Type a greater-than symbol (>) in the OP field to the right of the equal sign (=). Press
Enter to update the OP field. This tells Xpediter/CICS to search for a segment with a
value in PARTKEY greater than or equal to low values, such as the first segment in the
database (Figure 13-6).
Figure 13-6. Modifying the SSA on the Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4)

MODULE: CSECT:

COMMANDS: PCB
DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ RECFM: ** PSB IS NOT SCHEDULED **
NAME LV CODE OPTS NAME LEN **** NO PCB AVAILABLE ****

SSA 01 OF 01 --------------------SEARCH KEY------------------
01 PARTROOT *--- ( PARTKEY => .................)
000000000000000005
00000000000000000D

** **END**
2. Type PCB and press Enter to schedule a PSB. Xpediter/CICS displays the message
************* PSB SCHEDULED VIA "PCB" COMMAND *************
to show that the PSB has been scheduled.

3. Type GN in the COMMAND field and press Enter to display the next segment in the
database. The Edit DL/1 Segment screen (5.4.4) appears with the PCB field area
updated for the selected segment (Figure 13-7).
Figure 13-7. Displaying the Area on the PCB Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4)

MODULE: ********************** I/O COMPLETED **********************

COMMANDS: TERM GU GHU GN GHN GNP GHNP ISRT REPL DLET CANCEL
DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ RECFM: F **** PSB IS SCHEDULED ****
NAME LV CODE OPTS NAME LEN ----+---10----+17
DI21PART 01 A PARTROOT 00017 02AN960C10
FFCDFFFCFF4444444
02159603100000000

SSA 01 OF 01 --------------------SEARCH KEY------------------
01 PARTROOT *--- ( PARTKEY => .................)
000000000000000005
00000000000000000D

** **END**
The PCB field area displays data fields obtained from the PCB used in the last DL/1
call. These fields reflect the current position in the database and the status returned
by DL/1.
The DBD field identifies DI21PART as the database being accessed. The LV and
SEGMENT NAME fields indicate the lowest segment in the last path DL/1
encountered while searching for the requested segment. The blanks in the STAT
CODE field indicate that the call was successful. If there was an error in processing,
this field would display a two-character status code, such as GB, AK or NO. In
addition, Xpediter/CICS provides extended diagnostics for many of the displayed
status codes. You can view these diagnostics by typing HELP xx in the COMMAND
field, where xx is the DL/1 status code.
The value in the PROC OPTS field indicates the type of call that can be issued by this
PCB. The A value indicates that all types of calls can be issued. A G value would
indicate get processing calls.
4. To display the data retrieved in this call, type SHOW DATA on the COMMAND field
and press Enter. The SSA area at the bottom of the screen is replaced by the segment
data (Figure 13-8).
Figure 13-8. Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4) - SHOW DATA

MODULE: CSECT:

FFCDFFFCFF4444444
02159603100000000
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50
02AN960C10 WASHER
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50
5. The segment information can be displayed in several different formats to make

editing easier. Use the HEX ON and HEX DUMP commands to format the display as
shown in Figure 13-9 and Figure 13-10. HEX OFF returns the display to character
format.
Figure 13-9. Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4) - HEX ON

MODULE: CSECT:

FFCDFFFCFF4444444
02159603100000000
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50
02AN960C10 WASHER
FFCDFFFCFF4444444444444444ECECCD444444444444444444
02159603100000000000000000061285900000000000000000
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50
6. To redisplay the original SSA, type SHOW SSA on the COMMAND line and press
Enter.
Figure 13-10. Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4) - HEX DUMP

MODULE: CSECT:

FFCDFFFCFF4444444
02159603100000000
000000 000 F0F2C1D5 F9F6F0C3 F1F04040 40404040 * 02AN960C10 *
000010 010 40404040 40404040 4040E6C1 E2C8C5D9 * WASHER *
000020 020 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * *
000030 030 4040 * *
**END**
7. To update the SSA with key feedback data from the segment, type SHOW KEYS on
the COMMAND line and press Enter. This is used to update the SSA to the current
segment (Figure 13-11).
Figure 13-11. Edit DL/1 Segment Screen (5.4.4) - SHOW KEYS

MODULE: ********************** I/O COMPLETED **********************

FFCDFFFCFF4444444
02159603100000000
SSA 01 OF 01 --------------------SEARCH KEY------------------
01 PARTROOT *--- ( PARTKEY = 02AN960C10 )
FFCDFFFCFF44444445
02159603100000000D
** **END**
8. The GN (GETNEXT) command can be used to browse the database.

14-1
Chapter 14.
Using Xpediter/CICS with DB2 Chap 14
Xpediter/CICS provides support for IBMs DB2 relational database manager. In addition
to the extensive interactive debugging facilities available to all CICS programs, special
facilities have been created to meet the needs of the DB2 programmer.

Using the DB2 Easy Query

Xpediter/CICS provides selection lists that specify the columns to be used, then generates
SQL calls and passes them to DB2 to execute. The DB2 File Utility in Xpediter/CICS
honors all DB2 security and referential integrity rules. You can use the DB2 file utility to
update only the tables you have authority to access.
Note: A sample Compuware database was used to generate the screens shown in this
chapter. Since the database you access will be different, your screens will vary
database.
In order to limit resource contention, access to the DB2 File Utility is prohibited from a
terminal that has a program in a BREAK/ABEND state.
Setting DB2 Session Default Attributes

The DB2 Setup screen lets you override default DB2 parameters established during
installation.
1. From a blank CICS screen, type XPED 5.5 and press Enter to access the DB2 Easy
Query Menu (Figure 14-1).
Figure 14-1. DB2 Easy Query Menu (5.5)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 EASY QUERY MENU (5.5) --------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

0 SETUP - Set default DB2 session attributes
1 TABLE/VIEW LIST - List all DB2 tables and views
2. Type 0 and press Enter to display the DB2 Setup screen (5.5.0) (Figure 14-2).
Figure 14-2. DB2 Setup Screen (5.5.0)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 SETUP (5.5.0) ------------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

STRING DELIMITER ===> ' (' or ")
DECIMAL INDICATOR ===> . (. or ,)
NULL COLUMN DISPLAY CHARACTER ===> @
VARIABLE LENGTH COLUMN END OF STRING CHARACTER ===> |
TRUNCATE TRAILING BLANKS ===> Y
USE LOCAL/GMT WHEN INSERTING NEW COLUMN ===> LOCAL (Local/GMT)

LIST OF TABLES/VIEW LIMITS: CREATOR ===> *
TABLE/VIEW ===> *
TYPE ===> * (Table/View)
DATABASE ===> *
TABLESPACE ===> *
MAXIMUM ROWS TO SELECT ===> 250 (1 - 1000)
LOCK TABLES WHEN UPDATING ===> N (Y/N)
LOCK TABLES GLOBAL OVERRIDE ===> NO
It is unlikely that you will change the first six fields shown on this screen. The LIST
OF TABLES/VIEW LIMITS fields are used to limit the tables displayed on the DB2
Table/View List screen (5.5.1). The MAXIMUM ROWS TO SELECT field limits the
number of rows retrieved during a browse or query. This value is set during
installation and may be changed. The maximum value, which defaults to 1,000, is set
at product installation time and cant be exceeded.
The LOCK TABLES WHEN UPDATING field places or prohibits a lock on a table
selected for update. Specifying Y means that others cannot modify the table while
you access it. If you specify N in this field, you risk losing changes, but you gain
resource savings. For this reason, the system programmer can disable the lock
capability. If the lock capability is disabled, the LOCK TABLES GLOBAL OVERRIDE
field is set to NO.
3. To change a value on this screen, type over the existing value and press Enter. If the
Xpediter/CICS profile dataset is used, the overrides are saved for future debugging
sessions.
Accessing a List of DB2 Tables

1. Type =5.5.1 in the COMMAND field of any Xpediter/CICS screen and press Enter to
transfer to the DB2 Table/View List screen (5.5.1) (Figure 14-3).
Using Xpediter/CICS with DB2 14-3
Figure 14-3. DB2 Table/View List Screen (5.5.1)
----------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 TABLE/VIEW LIST (5.5.1) -------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

ROW 177 OF 494

LIMIT LIST TO: CREATOR: * TABLE/VIEW: * TYPE: *
DATABASE: * TABLESPACE: *

LINE COMMANDS: Q (SQL Easy Query) S (Select)

CMD CREATOR TABLE/VIEW NAME TYPE DATABASE TABLESPACE
--- -------- ------------------ ----- -------- ----------
_ DSN8230 TOPTVAL TABLE DSN8D23P DSN8S23C
_ DSN8230 VACT VIEW DSN8D23A ACT
_ DSN8230 VASTRDE1 VIEW DSNDB06 SYSVIEWS
_ DSN8230 VASTRDE2 VIEW DSN8D23A DSN8S23E
_ DSN8230 VCONA VIEW DSN8D23P DSN8S23C
_ DSN8230 VDEPMG1 VIEW DSN8D23A DSN8S23D
_ DSN8230 VDEPT VIEW DSN8D23A DSN8S23D
_ DSN8230 VDSPTXT VIEW DSN8D23P DSN8S23C
_ DSN8230 VEMP VIEW DSN8D23A DSN8S23E
_ DSN8230 VEMPLP VIEW DSN8D23A DSN8S23E
_ DSN8230 VEMPPROJACT VIEW DSN8D23A EMPPROJA
The DB2 Table/View List screen (5.5.1) displays a list of DB2 tables and views you are
authorized to access. The list is in alphabetical order by creator. DB2 security limits
the list to tables and views you are allowed to access with your CICS user ID.
The list can be further restricted by entering CREATOR, DATABASE, TABLE/VIEW,
TABLESPACE, or TYPE in the LIMIT LIST TO fields. If these fields were specified on
the DB2 Setup screen (5.5.0), these values are carried forward and appear on this
screen.
There are two choices from this screen: Q to create an SQL Easy Query or S to select a
table or view on which to work.
2. Type the S line command in the CMD field next to any table and press Enter to
display the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4) (Figure 14-4).
Figure 14-4. DB2 Browse Result Table Screen (5.5.4)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BROWSE RESULT TABLE (5.5.4) -----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
VALID COMMANDS: CANCEL FIND LOCATE END

CREATOR: DSN8230 TABLE: EMP ROW 1 OF 49
POSITION 1 OF 139
LINE COMMANDS: D (Delete) I (Insert) R (Replicate) S (Select)

EMPNO FIRSTNME MIDINIT LASTNAME WORKDEPT PHONENO HIREDATE JOB
* ------ ------------ ------- --------------- -------- ------- ---------- -----
_ 000010 CHRIS I HAAS A00 3978 1965-01-01 PRES
_ 000020 MICHAEL S THOMPSON B01 3476 1973-10-10 ANALY
_ 000030 SALLY b KWAN C01 4738 1975-04-05 ANALY
_ 000050 JOHN B PENDERS E01 6789 1949-08-17 ANALY
_ 000060 IRVING F STERN D11 6423 1973-09-14 ANALY
_ 000070 EVA D PULASKI D21 7831 1980-09-30 ANALY
_ 000090 EILEEN W HENDERSON E11 5498 1970-08-15 ANALY
_ 000100 THEODORE Q SPENSER E21 0972 1980-06-19 ANALY
_ 000110 VINCENZO G LUCCHESI A00 3490 1958-05-16 SALES
_ 000120 SEAN OCONNELL A00 2167 1963-12-05 CLERK
_ 000130 DOLORES M QUINTANA C01 4578 1971-07-28 ANALY
_ 000140 HEATHER A NICHOLLS C01 1793 1976-12-15 ANALY
_ 000150 BRUCE ADAMSON D11 4510 1972-02-12 DESIG
This screen displays the rows in the selected table. The display is by column name,
and the rows are automatically formatted. The ROW field shows the current top row
and the number of rows in the resulting table. The total rows may be limited by the
MAXIMUM ROWS TO SELECT parameter on the DB2 Setup screen (5.5.0). The FIND
and LOCATE commands can be used to find a string or shift the display to a
particular column.
Editing a Row
1. Type S next to any row displayed on the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4) and
press Enter. The DB2 Edit Result Table Row screen (5.5.5) appears as shown in Figure
14-5.
Figure 14-5. DB2 Edit Result Table Row Screen (5.5.5)
-------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 EDIT RESULT TABLE ROW (5.5.5) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

POSITION 1 OF 15

LINE COMMANDS: C (Composite column edit) N (Set field to NULL value)

VARLEN
COLUMN NAME ATTRIBUTES OR NULL VALUE
------------------ --------------- ------- ----+---10---15
_ EMPNO CHAR(6) 000010
_ FIRSTNME VARCHAR(12) 5 CHRIS
_ MIDINIT CHAR(1) I
_ LASTNAME VARCHAR(15) 4 HAAS
_ WORKDEPT CHAR(3) A00
_ PHONENO CHAR(4) 3978
_ HIREDATE DATE 1965-01-01
_ JOBCODE DECIMAL(3,0) 123
_ EDLEVEL SMALLINT 18
_ SEX CHAR(1) F
_ BIRTHDATE DATE 1933-08-14
This screen is used to edit data in the selected row of the DB2 result table. Data in all
columns may be updated. If you are not authorized to update a column by DB2
security, the contents of the column are protected to prevent modification.
2. You can move to a specific column by using the FIND command to position to a data
string, or LOCATE to position to a column name. Two line commands are also
available: N sets a field to null, and C transfers to the DB2 Edit Composite Column
screen (5.5.6) described in Editing a Column on page 14-9.
The DB2 File Utility has built-in edit functions to verify data.
3. Position the cursor to the VALUE field in a column with a DECIMAL attribute.
Overtype the displayed value, and type an additional character. In this sample, we
attempted to enter a four-character value in the JOBCODE field defined as DECIMAL
(3,0).
4. Press Enter. Xpediter/CICS displays an error message
+++++++++++ INTEGER TO DECIMAL CONVERSION ERROR +++++++++++
to show that the data was entered incorrectly.

Xpediter/CICS provides specific diagnostics for many DB2 errors.
Note: The plus signs (+++) preceding and following the message indicate that
additional detail information is available using the Help facility.
5. Press PF1 (HELP) to access the Help screen (Figure 14-6).
Figure 14-6. Help Screen for INTEGER TO DECIMAL CONVERSION ERROR Message
-------------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - HELP TEXT ----------------------C123

MODULE: ******** HIT PF1 AGAIN FOR HELP ON USING TUTORIALS ********

MESSAGE "INTEGER TO DECIMAL CONVERSION ERROR"

An attempt to convert an integer value to decimal value would result
in a conversion error because the integer is either too small or too
large for the scale of the decimal receiving field.

Examples:

IF A is defined as DECIMAL(3,0)

A = -1000 or A = 28325 fails because the range of valid values
for A would be -999 to +999.

IF A is defined as DECIMAL(5,3)

A = -1000 or A = 28325 fails because the range of valid values
for A would be -99.999 to +99.999.
Use the information displayed on the Help screen to determine the source of the
error message.
6. Press PF3 (END) to return to the DB2 Edit Result Table Row screen (5.5.5).
7. Position the cursor over the incorrect data and fix the error. Press Enter.
8. Press PF3 (END) to return to the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4) (Figure 14-7).
The changes you made are displayed on this screen. You can use the CANCEL
command to cancel the changes. Changes are committed when the END command is
used to exit this screen.

MODULE: CSECT:

POSITION 1 OF 139

EMPNO FIRSTNME MIDINIT LASTNAME WORKDEPT PHONENO HIREDATE JOB
* ------ ------------ ------- --------------- -------- ------- ---------- -----
_ 000010 CHRIS I HAAS A00 3978 1965-01-01 PRES
_ 000020 MICHAEL S THOMPSON B01 3476 1973-10-10 ANALY
_ 000030 SALLY b KWAN C01 4738 1975-04-05 ANALY
_ 000050 JOHN B PENDERS E01 6789 1949-08-17 ANALY
_ 000060 IRVING F STERN D11 6423 1973-09-14 ANALY
_ 000070 EVA D PULASKI D21 7831 1980-09-30 ANALY
_ 000090 EILEEN W HENDERSON E11 5498 1970-08-15 ANALY
_ 000100 THEODORE Q SPENSER E21 0972 1980-06-19 ANALY
_ 000110 VINCENZO G LUCCHESI A00 3490 1958-05-16 SALES
_ 000120 SEAN OCONNELL A00 2167 1963-12-05 CLERK
_ 000130 DOLORES M QUINTANA C01 4578 1971-07-28 ANALY
_ 000140 HEATHER A NICHOLLS C01 1793 1976-12-15 ANALY
_ 000150 BRUCE ADAMSON D11 4510 1972-02-12 DESIG
Building an SQL Easy Query

1. Return to the DB2 Table/View List screen by typing =5.5.1 in any Xpediter/CICS
COMMAND field and pressing Enter.
2. Type the Q line command in the CMD field next to a table and press Enter. The DB2
Build SQL Easy Query screen (5.5.2) appears (Figure 14-8).
Figure 14-8. DB2 Build SQL Easy Query Screen (5.5.2)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BUILD SQL EASY QUERY (5.5.2) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
VALID COMMANDS: SHOW RESULT/SQL CHECK RESET END

POSITION 1 OF 254

LINE COMMANDS: A (After) B (Before) M/MM (Move) S/SS (Select) X/XX (eXclude)

ORDER-BY WHERE CLAUSE
CMD COLUMN NAME ATTRIBUTES SEQ A/D VALUES AND OPERATORS
--------------------- --------------- --- --- ----+---10----+---20----+---30-->
__ EMPNO CHAR(6) __ _
__ FIRSTNME VARCHAR(12) __ _
__ MIDINIT CHAR(1) __ _
__ LASTNAME VARCHAR(15) __ _
__ WORKDEPT CHAR(3) __ _
__ PHONENO CHAR(4) __ _
__ HIREDATE DATE __ _
__ JOB CHAR(8) __ _
__ EDLEVEL SMALLINT __ _
__ SEX CHAR(1) __ _
__ BIRTHDATE DATE __ _
This ISPF-like screen lets you select the fields to be used in the SQL call. You can
select the columns to display, the left-to-right order of the columns to be displayed,
the row selection using WHERE clauses, and the sort sequence using ORDER-BY
clauses.
3. Select desired columns by typing an S to the left of each column.
4. Type a two-character number in the ORDER-BY SEQ field to designate the order in
which you would like the columns to be sorted.
5. Type A or D in the ORDER-BY A/D field to specify the ascending or descending sort
sequence for this column.
6. Type a WHERE clause in the WHERE CLAUSE field. In the example shown in Figure
14-9, we entered a clause for the HIREDATE, so only those rows with a hire date after
May 1, 1975 appear in the result table.
7. Press Enter to process the selection criteria.
Figure 14-9. DB2 Build SQL Easy Query Screen (5.5.2)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BUILD SQL EASY QUERY (5.5.2) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
POSITION 1 OF 254


--------------------- --------------- --- --- ----+---10----+---20----+---30-->
S_ EMPNO CHAR(6) __ _
S_ FIRSTNME VARCHAR(12) 02 A
S_ MIDINIT CHAR(1) __ _
S_ LASTNAME VARCHAR(15) 01 A
S_ WORKDEPT CHAR(3) __ _
S_ PHONENO CHAR(4) __ _
S_ HIREDATE DATE __ _ > '1975-05-01'
__ JOB CHAR(8) __ _
__ EDLEVEL SMALLINT __ _
__ SEX CHAR(1) __ _
__ BIRTHDATE DATE __ _
8. Type SHOW SQL in the COMMAND field and press Enter. Xpediter/CICS generates
an SQL call, and the DB2 Browse Generated SQL Call screen (5.5.3) (Figure 14-10)
displays the actual SQL statement.
Figure 14-10. DB2 Browse Generated SQL Call Screen (5.5.3)
------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BROWSE GENERATED SQL CALL (5.5.3) --------C123

MODULE: ****************** SQL SYNTAX IS CORRECT ******************
VALID COMMANDS: SHOW RESULT CREATE REPLACE END

ROW 1 OF 10

---------------------------------- SQL CALL -----------------------------------
SELECT DSN8230.EMP.EMPNO,DSN8230.EMP.FIRSTNME,DSN8230.EMP.
MIDINIT,DSN8230.EMP.LASTNAME,DSN8230.EMP.WORKDEPT,
DSN8230.EMP.PHONENO,DSN8230.EMP.HIREDATE

FROM DSN8230.EMP

WHERE HIREDATE > '1975-05-01'

ORDER BY DSN8230.EMP.LASTNAME,
DSN8230.EMP.FIRSTNME
************************************ BOTTOM ***********************************
You can save the SQL call in the Xpediter/CICS SQL transfer file to be printed or
included in a program. Each SQL call is stored as a single record in this VSAM file
with the name you supply as an operand on the CREATE or REPLACE command. In
this way, you can use Xpediter/CICS to generate and test SQL calls before your
program is written, then include them in your program code. For more information,
see Chapter 6, DB2 Format Utility, in the Xpediter/CICS Installation and Configuration
Guide.
9. Type SHOW RESULT in the COMMAND field and press Enter to see the result table
generated by this call on the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4) (Figure 14-11).

MODULE: CSECT:

POSITION 1 OF 71

EMPNO FIRSTNME MIDINIT LASTNAME WORKDEPT PHONENO HIREDATE
* ------ ------------ ------- --------------- -------- ------- ----------
_ 1993-04-05
_ 51 1993-10-21
_ 000015 JOE COOL A00 7725 1993-05-12
_ 000260 SYBIL V JOHNSON D21 8953 1975-09-11
_ 000210 WILLIAM T JONES D11 0942 1979-04-11
_ 000330 WING LEE E21 2103 1976-02-23
_ 000240 SALVATORE M MARINO D21 3780 1979-12-05
_ 000140 HEATHER A NICHOLLS C01 1793 1976-12-15
_ 000290 JOHN R PARKER E11 4502 1980-05-30
_ 000270 MARIA L PEREZ D21 9001 1980-09-30
_ 000160 ELIZABETH R PIANKA D11 3782 1977-10-11
_ 000070 EVA D PULASKI D21 7831 1980-09-30
_ 000100 THEODORE Q SPENSER E21 0972 1980-06-19
This is the same screen that was discussed in Editing a Row on page 14-4. Rows can
be selected from this table for updating.
10. Type the R line command next to a row and press Enter to replicate this row.
11. Type the S line command next to the new row and press Enter. The DB2 Edit Result
Table Row screen (5.5.5) appears (Figure 14-12).
12. Type new information in the VALUE field of this screen and press Enter. In the
example shown here, JOE COOL will be changed to RALPH COOL.
13. The changes are updated in the new row.
Figure 14-12. DB2 Edit Result Table Row Screen (5.5.5)
-------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 EDIT RESULT TABLE ROW (5.5.5) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

POSITION 1 OF 15

LINE COMMANDS: C (Composite column edit) N (Set field to NULL value)

VARLEN
COLUMN NAME ATTRIBUTES OR NULL VALUE
------------------ --------------- ------- ----+---10---15
_ EMPNO CHAR(6) 000015
_ FIRSTNME VARCHAR(12) 12 JOE
_ MIDINIT CHAR(1)
_ LASTNAME VARCHAR(15) 15 COOL
_ WORKDEPT CHAR(3) A00
_ PHONENO CHAR(4) 7725
_ HIREDATE DATE 1993-05-12
**END**
14. Press PF3 (END) to see the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4) Figure 14-13.
Remember that unless the CANCEL command is used, changes are committed when
you leave the DB2 Browse Result Table screen (5.5.4).

MODULE: CSECT:

POSITION 1 OF 71

EMPNO FIRSTNME MIDINIT LASTNAME WORKDEPT PHONENO HIREDATE
* ------ ------------ ------- --------------- -------- ------- ----------
_ 000015 RALPH COOL A00 7725 1993-05-12
_ 000260 SYBIL V JOHNSON D21 8953 1975-09-11
_ 000210 WILLIAM T JONES D11 0942 1979-04-11
_ 000330 WING LEE E21 2103 1976-02-23
_ 000240 SALVATORE M MARINO D21 3780 1979-12-05
_ 000140 HEATHER A NICHOLLS C01 1793 1976-12-15
_ 000290 JOHN R PARKER E11 4502 1980-05-30
_ 000270 MARIA L PEREZ D21 9001 1980-09-30
_ 000160 ELIZABETH R PIANKA D11 3782 1977-10-11
_ 000070 EVA D PULASKI D21 7831 1980-09-30
_ 000100 THEODORE Q SPENSER E21 0972 1980-06-19
_ 000170 MASATOSHI J YOSHIMURA D11 2890 1978-09-15
*********************************** BOTTOM **********************************
Editing a Column
The DB2 Edit Composite Column screen (5.5.6) (Figure 14-14) lets you edit data in a DB2
result table column. This screen is accessed by using the C line command from the DB2
Edit Result Table Row screen (5.5.5). Composite columns are defined in Xpediter/CICS as
DATE, TIME, TIMESTAMP, CHARACTER, or GRAPHIC columns that are redefined by a
user in an application program. Use this support when the 300-column limit is too
restrictive, or if you have kanji data in a column.
The USING command can be used to map data values against an 01 level COBOL data
structure.
Figure 14-14. DB2 Edit Composite Column Screen (5.5.6)
-------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 EDIT COMPOSITE COLUMN (5.5.6) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

CREATOR: CWX0030 TABLE: COMPOSITE_TABLE COLUMN NAME: VARCHAR_FIELD

DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: 000000 COLUMN LENGTH: 00088

----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+-->
GEORGE PDOS EQUUS ...>0591734126602D FAE8900001
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+-->
DB2 Long Identifier Considerations

IBM DB2 UDB V8 for z/OS introduced many changes to the DB2 product, including the
introduction of long identifier fields in DB2 V8 New Function Mode (NFM). The
identifier lengths that affect the Xpediter/CICS DB2 File Utility are as follows:
The permissible length of the table creator name has increased from 8 to 128 bytes.
The permissible length of the table/view name has increased from 18 to 128 bytes.
The permissible length of the column name has increased from 18 to 30 bytes.
The Xpediter/CICS DB2 File Utility provides all of the functionality of the previous
releases of the DB2 File Utility, including support for DB2 and long identifiers. Because of
screen limitations, however, the maximum display sizes for the creator, table name, and
column name fields are limited to 8, 18, and 18 bytes respectively in Xpediter/CICS. If a
DB2 field exceeds these lengths, the field is truncated for display (only), and a plus
character + is appended to the right of that field. For example, a creator name of
CREATOR_NAME_IS_LONGER_THAN_V7 is truncated to 8 bytes and displayed as
CREATOR_+, a table name of TABLE_NAME_IS_LONGER_THAN_V7 is truncated to 18
bytes and displayed as TABLE_NAME_IS_LONG+, and a column name of
COLUMN_IS_LONGER_THAN_V7 is truncated to 18 bytes and displayed as
COLUMN_IS_LONGER_T+. The full length of these fields is only displayed on the DB2
BROWSE GENERATED SQL CALL (5.5.3) screen.
Following are examples of three DB2 File Utility screens showing the result of displaying
the DB2 long identifiers in the File Utility.
Figure 14-15 shows an example of the DB2 TABLE/VIEW LIST (5.5.1) screen. In the first
row of this display the long creator ABCDEF_LONG_CREATOR_TEST has been truncated
and is displayed as eight bytes ABCDEF_L and a plus sign (+) is appended to the right of
the field. Likewise the table name of LONG_TABLE_NAME_FOR__TESTING_DCLGEN has
been truncated to eighteen bytes and a plus sign appended.
Figure 14-15. DB2 Table/View List
---------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 TABLE/VIEW LIST (5.5.1) -------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

ROW 1 OF 90

LIMIT LIST TO: CREATOR: * TABLE/VIEW: * TYPE: *
DATABASE: * TABLESPACE: *
LINE COMMANDS: Q (SQL Easy Query) S (Select)

CMD CREATOR TABLE/VIEW NAME TYPE DATABASE TABLESPACE
--- -------- ------------------ ----- -------- ----------
_ ABCDEF_L+ LONG_TABLE_NAME_FO+ TABLE DBJAGTST DBJAGTST
_ ACMEJET0 AGEGROUP TABLE DJSMQTDB TSM00001
_ ACMEJET0 CITY TABLE DJSMQTDB TSM00001
_ ACMEJET0 CUSTOMER TABLE DJSMQTDB TSM00001
Typing a Q in the command field of the first row and pressing Enter causes the DB2
BUILD SQL EASY QUERY (5.5.2) screen in Figure 14-16 to be displayed. In the heading
both the CREATOR: and TABLE: data has been truncated for display and a plus sign has
been appended to the right of each field. The long column name
OBJS_RELATE_LONGER_CL_NAME has been truncated to eighteen bytes and a plus sign
has been appended to the right of the field.
Figure 14-16. DB2 Build SQL Easy Query
-------------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BUILD SQL EASY QUERY (5.5.2) ----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

CREATOR: ABCDEF_L+ TABLE: LONG_TABLE_NAME_FO+ ROW 1 OF 8
POSITION 1 OF 254


--------------------- --------------- --- --- ----+---10----+---20----+---30->
__ OBJS_ID CHAR(8) __ _
__ OBJS_RELATE_LONGER+ CHAR(16) __ _
__ OBJS_TYPE CHAR(2) __ _
__ OBJS_DBNAME CHAR(8) __ _
__ OBJS_TSNAME CHAR(8) __ _
__ OBJS_CREATOR_LONGE+ VARCHAR(228) __ _
__ OBJS_NAME VARCHAR(128) __ _
__ OBJS_RELNAME VARCHAR(128) __ _
Entering the primary command SHOW SQL, typing an S in the command field for the
column name OBJS_RELATE_LONGER, and pressing Enter causes the DB2 BROWSE
GENERATED SQL CALL (5.5.3) screen in Figure 14-17 to be displayed. Notice on this
screen that the full lengths of the creator, table name, and column are displayed in the
generated SQL call.
Figure 14-17. DB2 Browse Generated SQL Call
----------- XPEDITER/CICS - DB2 BROWSE GENERATED SQL CALL (5.5.3) --------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
VALID COMMANDS: SHOW RESULT CREATE REPLACE END

ROW 1 OF 6

---------------------------------- SQL CALL -----------------------------------
SELECT ABCDEF_LONG_CREATOR_TEST.
LONG_TABLE_NAME_FOR__TESTING_DCLGEN.
OBJS_RELATE_LONGER_CL_NAME

FROM ABCDEF_LONG_CREATOR_TEST.
LONG_TABLE_NAME_FOR__TESTING_DCLGEN
************************************ BOTTOM ***********************************
Debugging DB2 Programs

This section discusses the special facilities available to DB2 programmers, including
setting breakpoints and keeps, interpreting abends and SQL codes, and accessing DB2
storage.
Setting Breakpoints in SQL Code

Your online source listing displays both commented-out SQL commands and the DB2
translated code. As a result, Xpediter/CICS lets you set or delete breakpoints in all
generated instructions. In addition, Xpediter/CICS allows you to globally set breakpoints
on all SQL calls.
To set breakpoints before every SQL statement, enter BEFORE ALL SQL in the
COMMAND field and press Enter. Xpediter/CICS dynamically sets before breakpoints
on every SQL statement or call to DSNHLI.
You can also set breakpoints after EXEC SQL statements and counts of EXEC SQL
statements. Breakpoints can be set on all returning SQL calls, or counts can be set to
help in SQL analysis.
DB2 breakpoints are further qualified by specifying an SQL call type. For example,
COUNT ALL SQL UPDATE sets counters only on EXEC SQL UPDATE calls. No other
calls are counted. Of course, you can set or delete individual breakpoints using the
BEFORE, AFTER, RUNTO, COUNT, and DELETE commands.
Setting Keeps on DB2-Specific Data

In Xpediter/CICS, the KEEP command is used to continuously view a data field on the
Source Listing screen (2.L). You can display various DB2 data items, such as working
storage items, DFHCOMM fields, indices, and DB2 fields. You can add any DB2 specific
data item, such as SQLCODE or SQLERRM, to the keep window, as long as it is defined to
your program.
To display the current SQLCODE value, enter KEEP SQLCODE in the COMMAND field.
Once displayed, you can modify data by replacing the contents of the field. This is an
excellent way to test IF logic after an SQL call.
Interpreting DSNC Abends and SQL Codes

Xpediter/CICS automatically traps all encountered abends, including DB2 DSNC abends.
Xpediter/CICS recognizes DSNC reason codes and treats them like any other abend. It
intercepts the abend before it takes place and returns control to you.
DSNC Abends
For example, if your DB2 program abends with a DSNC AEY9 abend code, Xpediter/CICS
will:
Intercept the abend

Format the Source Listing screen
Point to the offending call
Flag the abend code as an AEY9.
If CICS Abend-AID is installed, additional DB2 information is available. Typing =7.1 in

the COMMAND field and pressing Enter allows you to jump directly into CICS Abend-
AID to diagnose an AEY9 as a call to DB2 prior to activation.
DSNC abend recognition is especially useful in test regions prone to DB2 attachment-
facility errors. This Xpediter feature is designed to assist both the DBA and the DB2
application programmer.
SQL Codes
Programmers commonly complain about cryptic return codes. This is also true for DB2
SQL codes. Xpediter/CICS has SQL support within its Help facility.
Enter HELP SQLERROR, HELP SQLCODE, or HELP SQL to access timely SQL diagnostics
and warnings of the last SQL statement executed. Figure 14-18 is an example of help after
DB2 returned a 100 SQLCODE.
Figure 14-18. Help Exit Screen
-------------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - HELP EXIT ----------------------C123

MODULE: TRICDB2T ******** HIT PF1 AGAIN FOR HELP ON USING TUTORIALS ********
DSNT404I SQLCODE = 100, NOT FOUND: ROW NOT FOUND FOR FETCH, UPDATE, OR
DELETE, OR THE RESULT OF A QUERY IS AN EMPTY TABLE
DSNT415I SQLERRP = DSNXRFCH SQL PROCEDURE DETECTING ERROR
DSNT416I SQLERRD = 110 0 0 1 0 0 SQL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
DSNT416I SQLERRD = X'FFFFFF92' X'00000000' X'00000000' X'FFFFFFFF'
X'00000000' X'00000000' SQL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
Accessing DB2 Storage

Xpediter/CICS provides extensive access to any CICS table or control area. These areas
are accessed in hexadecimal using the Memory Display screen (2.2), or mapped to a
DSECT of the current IBM data area description using the DSECTs screen (2.D). Both
screens allow keyword access.
Five DB2 related keywords are available for use in the TABLE/AREA field of the Memory
Display (2.2) and DSECTs (2.D) screens. These commands are useful in diagnosing DB2
programs with the following storage problems:
RCT (DB2 Resource Control Table): Identifies the plan name, thread, and TCB
information.
Since the RCT is no longer available, if RCT is specified, the CICS Resources screen
(2.R) is displayed showing information for the DB2CONN entry.
SQLCA (SQL Communications Area): Identifies the SQL return code, error
diagnostics, and warning indicators of the last SQL statement executed.
SQLDA (SQL Descriptor Area): Provides a pointer to the data received by a SELECT
statement in a dynamic SQL call.
PLIST (DB2 Parameter List): List of parameters passed to the DB2 call generated by
an EXEC SQL program statement.
CLOT (CICS Life of Task): Provides the DB2 connection authorization ID, and
various error codes associated with the task.
Note: All of the above keywords (except RCT) can only be used at a break or abend with
DB2 active.
15-1
Chapter 15.
Using Xpediter/CICS with MQ Chap 15
Xpediter/CICS provides support for IBM MQ for z/OS (formerly WebSphere MQ)
messaging manager. In addition to the extensive interactive debugging facilities available
to all CICS programs, special facilities have been created to meet the needs of the MQ
programmer.

Using the MQ File Utility

Xpediter/CICS provides a list of MQ queues available to the CICS system and allows you
to browse messages on local queues. You can also add and delete messages on an MQ
queue. For more information, see the descriptions of the DELETE, GETPUT, and PUT
commands in the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual. The MQ File Utility in Xpediter/CICS
honors all MQ security rules. You can use the MQ File Utility only with the queues you
have authority to access.
Note: Messages created by a sample application were used to generate the screens shown
in this chapter. Since the data you access will be different, your screens will vary
queues.
Accessing a List of MQ Queues

1. From a blank CICS screen, type XPED 5.6 and press Enter to display the MQ Menu
screen (5.6) shown in Figure 15-1.
Figure 15-1. MQ Menu (5.6)
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - MQ MENU (5.6) --------------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

0 SETUP - Set default MQ session attributes
1 QUEUE LIST - List all MQ queues
2 BROWSE QUEUE - Browse messages in a queue
3 UPDATE QUEUE - Add or delete messages in a queue
2. Type 0 and press Enter to display the MQ SETUP screen (5.6.0) shown in Figure 15-2.
Figure 15-2. MQ Setup (5.6.0)
----------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - MQ SETUP (5.6.0) ------------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: CSECT:

LIST OF MQ QUEUES LIMITS:

MQ LIST PREFIX ===>
MQ LIST TYPE ===>
MQ LIST LIMIT ===> (1 - 99999), SPACES = LIST ALL

DYNAMIC QUEUE PREFIX ===>

------------------------------- P F K E Y S -------------------------------
The MQ LIST PREFIX, MQ LIST TYPE, and MQ LIST LIMIT can be customized or
established in each of these fields to limit the queues displayed on the MQ Queue List
(5.6.1) screen. The DYNAMIC QUEUE PREFIX can also be entered for your session if you
need to override your sites prefix which is found in global. If the Xpediter/CICS profile
dataset is used, your overrides are saved for future debugging sessions.
3. Type 1 and press Enter to display the MQ Queue List screen (5.6.1) (Figure 15-3).
Figure 15-3. MQ Queue List (5.6.1)
-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - MQ QUEUE LIST (5.6.1) ----------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
QUEUE TYPE: * QUEUE LIMIT: QUEUE MANAGER NAME: M530
QUEUE NAME PREFIX: *

LINE COMMAND: B (Browse) S (Select)

CMD QUEUE NAME TYPE CUR DEPTH
--- ----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+--- ------- ----------
_ csq1 QLOCAL 0
_ efhrja0.test.chin.traffic QLOCAL 0
_ kevinsqueue QLOCAL 12
_ pnlkkh0.testQueue QLOCAL 0
_ pnlkkh0.testTopic QLOCAL 0
_ vp.csq4samp.batch.forward.queue QLOCAL 1
_ ASASASASPLANNING.SITE.REPORTS.RESPONSE.QUEUE01 QLOCAL 0
_ CF.TEST.QALIAS QALIAS
_ CF.TEST.QLOCAL QLOCAL 0
------------------------------- P F K E Y S -------------------------------
The QUEUE TYPE field, QUEUE NAME PREFIX field, and QUEUE LIMIT field are used to
limit the queues displayed on this screen.
4. To change a value on the screen, type over the existing value and press Enter. Note
that the QUEUE NAME PREFIX field is case-sensitive.
Using Xpediter/CICS with MQ 15-3
Browsing Messages on an MQ Queue

1. On the MQ Queue List screen, locate any queue you are authorized to access that has
a non-zero value in the DEPTH column. You may need to scroll to locate an
appropriate queue.
2. Type the B line command in the CMD field next to the queue and press Enter to
transfer to the Browse MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.2) shown in Figure 15-4.
Note: Browsing a message from an initiation queue may cause a trigger event to occur,
which may result in a trigger message being generated in the initiation queue.
Figure 15-4. Browse MQ Queue Message Screen (5.6.2)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - BROWSE MQ QUEUE MESSAGE (5.6.2) -----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
VALID COMMANDS: FIRST NEXT UPDATE DELETE
TYPE : QLOCAL
QUEUE NAME : CSQ4SAMP.B2.RESPONSE DEPTH: 000000002
REPLYTOQ . :
REPLYTOQMGR: M520
PUTAPPLNAME: ACMEC123MVB2 PUTDATE: 20020703 PUTTIME: 18444269

TRIGGER TYPE: FIRST TRIGGER PRIORITY: 000000000 TRIGGER DEPTH: 000000001
TRIGGER DATA:

DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ REC-LENGTH: 001061
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
CSQ4BAM .............................FIRST GALACTIC BANK ............
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
The Browse MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.2) displays the first message on the selected
queue. There are two primary commands available on this screen: NEXT to browse the
next message on the queue and FIRST to reposition to the first message on the queue.
There may be two additional primary commands available on this screen: UPDATE to
transfer to the Update MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.3) and DELETE to delete the
currently accessed message.
Adding Messages on an MQ Queue

1. On the Browse MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.2), type the UPDATE primary
command and press Enter to transfer to the Update MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.3)
Figure 15-5. Update MQ Queue Message Screen (5.6.3)
--------------- XPEDITER/CICS - UPDATE MQ QUEUE MESSAGE (5.6.3) -----------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
VALID COMMANDS: DELETE PUT GETPUT DEFAULT
SHOW DATA/MQMD/MQOD/MQPMO

QUEUE NAME : CSQ4SAMP.B2.RESPONSE

DEC-OFFSET: 000000 ADD-OFFSET: ______ REC-LENGTH: 001061
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
CSQ4BAM .............................FIRST GALACTIC BANK ............
----+---10----+---20----+---30----+---40----+---50----+---60----+---70----+--->
The Update MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.3) displays the same message as the
Browse MQ Queue Message screen (5.6.2).
Debugging MQ Programs
This section discusses the special facilities available to IBM MQ for z/OS programmers,
including setting breakpoints and keeps and interpreting MQ completion and reason
codes.
Enhanced Traps for MQ Data

Enhanced trap support is also available for MQ. This support allows conditional traps on
data in the MQ Message Descriptor (MQMD) or MQ data area.
The traps may be defined using Xpediters Trap Summary screen (1.6 or 9.6), or a label
may be defined on the Define User Labels screen (1.9) or Define System Labels screen
(9.9) for use in a conditional trap, breakpoint, or skip. Please see the Xpediter/CICS
Reference Manual for more details.
Setting Breakpoints at MQ Calls

Xpediter/CICS allows you to globally set breakpoints on all MQ calls. To set breakpoints
before every call to MQ, type BEFORE ALL MQ in the COMMAND field and press Enter.
Xpediter/CICS dynamically sets before breakpoints on every call to MQ. Of course, you
can set or delete individual breakpoints using the BEFORE, AFTER, RUNTO, and DELETE
primary commands.
Setting Keeps on MQ-Specific Data

In Xpediter/CICS, the KEEP command is used to continuously view a data field on the
Source Listing screen (2.L). You can display various data items, such as working storage
items, DFHCOMM fields, and MQ fields. You can add any MQ specific data items, such as
a field within the MQMD structure, to the keep window, as long as it is defined to your
program. Once displayed, you can modify data by replacing the contents of the field.
This is an excellent way to test IF logic after an MQ call.
Interpreting MQ Completion and Reason Codes

Programmers commonly complain about cryptic return codes. Xpediter/CICS has MQ
support within its Help facility. Enter HELP MQRC to access a convenient list of MQ
completion code and reason codes.
16-1
Chapter 16.
Accessing CICS Storage Chap 16
This chapter discusses ways to access and update CICS storage, including displaying CICS
storage areas, DSECTs, and table entries. It also discusses how to chain through CICS
storage areas and review the Select Address list.

Accessing CICS Storage Areas

1. Type XPED 2.2 on a blank CICS screen.
2. Press Enter to display the Memory Display screen (2.2) (Figure 16-1).
Figure 16-1. Displaying TCA on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: TCA TABLE ENTRY ID: ________
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ ECDSA

EDIT NOT ALLOWED CCSID TYPE: EBCDIC
00000000 000 37E08180 00000001 383674D0 0004F2A0 * .\a........}..2. * 37E08080
00000010 010 380A8FB0 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ...^............ * 37E08090
00000020 020 0000332C 00000000 00000000 80084ABC * ............... * 37E080A0
00000030 030 00000000 00000000 008A8000 3960005C * .............-.* * 37E080B0
00000040 040 80240084 00082114 380A9878 B7856600 * ...d......q..e.. * 37E080C0
00000050 050 380A8FB0 378575FF 00000014 00004000 * ...^.e........ . * 37E080D0
00000060 060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E080E0
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E080F0
00000080 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08100
00000090 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08110
000000A0 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08120
000000B0 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08130
000000C0 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08140
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00102018 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08150
000000E0 0E0 8004FA18 00102080 37EBD818 008A6000 * ..........Q...-. * 37E08160
000000F0 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08170
The Memory Display screen (2.2) displays CICS storage areas. The task control area
(TCA) is displayed as the default area.
3. Type CSA in the TABLE/AREA field to display the common system area (CSA).
4. Press Enter to display the CSA storage area (Figure 16-2).
Figure 16-2. Displaying the CSA on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: CSA TABLE ENTRY ID: ________
ADDRESS: 0004FA18 HEX OFFSET: _______________________________
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ CDSA

00000000 000 00000198 0004B020 3B985200 B797DD66 * ...q..^..q...p.. * 0004FA18
00000010 010 80D3E6E0 80800000 3817D030 38123DA0 * .LW\......}..... * 0004FA28
00000020 020 00000000 38119480 0000010C 00000000 * ......m......... * 0004FA38
00000030 030 B797D8AC 384B3360 3817D030 383674D0 * .pQ....-..}....} * 0004FA48
00000040 040 00054AD0 37E01080 0010020C 37E08080 * ..}.\.......\.. * 0004FA58
00000050 050 1033240F 3744A100 00000100 00000000 * ......~......... * 0004FA68
00000060 060 0039FD51 00000000 00090830 0000E906 * ..............Z. * 0004FA78
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 7FFFFFFF 0107087F * ........"......" * 0004FA88
00000080 080 008A8000 FFFFFFFE 00009080 B70F1F98 * ...............q * 0004FA98
00000090 090 00000225 00000000 001E001E E707E764 * ............X.X. * 0004FAA8
000000A0 0A0 B783BF04 B6F34374 B7854F64 B77FB118 * .c...3...e|..".. * 0004FAB8
000000B0 0B0 B75FEC14 00055228 37E01080 00000000 * ........\...... * 0004FAC8
000000C0 0C0 0005E680 60000000 0004F2A0 00000000 * ..W.-.....2..... * 0004FAD8
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 0004FAE8
000000E0 0E0 0000020C 000C0000 02000000 373767DC * ................ * 0004FAF8
000000F0 0F0 0000007A 37376890 0000007B 00000000 * ...:.......#.... * 0004FB08
Displaying CICS DSECTs

You may display any CICS storage area in symbolic format.
1. Type =2.D in the COMMAND field to display the CSA DSECT.

2. Press Enter to display the DSECTs screen (2.D) (Figure 16-3). The following options
are available:
Access specific fields in the storage area by typing the field name in the LABEL
field.
Browse the storage area by pressing PF7 and PF8 to scroll up and down.
3. Press PF8 to scroll down. The DSECTs screen (2.D) is scrolled to show the next page of
DSECT entries.
Figure 16-3. Accessing the CSA on the DSECTs Screen (2.D)
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DSECTS (2.D) ---------------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
LABEL: ______________________________

80050A18 DFHCSADS DSECT
80050A18 000
DFHCSABA EQU *-DFHCSADS
80050A18 000
CSAOSRSA DS XL72 00000198 0004B020 * ...q..^. *
80050A60 048
CSASOSI DS 0C
80050A60 048
CSASSI1 DS XL1 00 * . *
CSAFPURG EQU X'80'
CSAFTCAB EQU X'40'
CSASDTRN EQU X'20'
CSACSDOP EQU X'02'
CSASOSON EQU X'01'
80050A61 049 CSAKCMI DS 0C
80050A61 049 CSASSI2 DS XL1 10 * . *
CSATCPEV EQU X'01'
CSAMXTON EQU X'02'
CSATQIM EQU X'04'
CSATCPQM EQU X'08'
CSAPLTPI EQU X'10'
CSATCSCN EQU X'20'
Accessing CICS Storage 16-3
Chaining through CICS Storage Areas

There may be times when you have the need to chain through storage to track down an
abend. Xpediter/CICS provides several methods to do this online. Four methods are
described separately in this section, each of which uses the same example Memory
Display screen (2.2) shown in Figure 16-4:
Method 1 USE CONTENTS and ADD OFFSET fields

Method 2 USE CONTENTS field
Method 3 PF15
Method 4 CHAIN command
Method 5 Task Storage screen (2.S).
Method 1
Use the USE CONTENTS and ADD OFFSET fields of the Memory Display screen (2.2) to
specify an address area to be displayed.
1. Transfer to the Memory Display screen (2.2) by pressing PF14 (MEMORY).
Figure 16-4. Chaining Through the CSA on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

MODULE: CSECT:
USE CONTENTS: X ADD OFFSET: 40___ CDSA

00000000 000 00000198 0004B020 3B985200 B797DD66 * ...q..^..q...p.. * 0004FA18
00000010 010 80D3E6E0 80800000 3817D030 38123DA0 * .LW\......}..... * 0004FA28
00000020 020 00000000 38119480 0000010C 00000000 * ......m......... * 0004FA38
00000030 030 B797D8AC 384B3360 3817D030 383674D0 * .pQ....-..}....} * 0004FA48
00000040 040 00054AD0 37E01080 0010020C 37E08080 * ..}.\.......\.. * 0004FA58
00000050 050 1033240F 3744A100 00000100 00000000 * ......~......... * 0004FA68
00000060 060 0039FD51 00000000 00090830 0000E906 * ..............Z. * 0004FA78
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 7FFFFFFF 0107087F * ........"......" * 0004FA88
00000090 090 00000225 00000000 001E001E E707E764 * ............X.X. * 0004FAA8
000000B0 0B0 B75FEC14 00055228 37E01080 00000000 * ........\...... * 0004FAC8
000000C0 0C0 0005E680 60000000 0004F2A0 00000000 * ..W.-.....2..... * 0004FAD8
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 0004FAE8
000000E0 0E0 0000020C 000C0000 02000000 373767DC * ................ * 0004FAF8
000000F0 0F0 0000007A 37376890 0000007B 00000000 * ...:.......#.... * 0004FB08
2. Type an X in the USE CONTENTS field and 40 in the ADD OFFSET field as shown in
Figure 16-4. The USE CONTENTS field specifies that Xpediter/CICS should use an
address from the display area to point to another area for display. The default uses
the address at offset hexadecimal 0 (meaning that there is no offset at all and that
Xpediter/CICS must use the displayed address).
The ADD OFFSET field is used to locate the address specified in the USE CONTENTS
field within the display. This specifies that Xpediter/CICS should use the address
found at offset hexadecimal 40 to locate another area, then display that area.
3. Press Enter. The storage area display is positioned at the address shown at an offset of
hexadecimal 40 from the start of the CSA.
Notice that the ADDRESS field has changed to show the new address.
Method 2
Use the USE CONTENTS field without the ADD OFFSET field to have Xpediter/CICS use
the first four bytes of the display as an address.
1. Type X in the USE CONTENTS field.

2. Press Enter. The Memory Display screen (2.2) displays the storage area at the address
located at hexadecimal offset 0.
Method 3
Use PF15 to select addresses.
1. Type CSA in the TABLE/AREA field and press Enter.

2. Move the cursor to the address at an offset of hexadecimal 04C on the screen.
3. Press PF15. The Memory Display screen (2.2) displays the storage area located at the
address at a hexadecimal offset of 04C.
Method 4
Use the CHAIN command to chain to the first address displayed in the storage area of the
screen. The CHAIN command works like the USE CONTENTS field described in Method
1 on page 16-3 and Method 2.
Because CHAIN is a primary command, it can be assigned to a PF key. This makes

chaining a one-key function. CHAIN can also be used with an offset. For example: CHAIN
4 or CHAIN 2C.
1. Type CHAIN in the COMMAND field.

2. Press Enter. The Memory Display screen (2.2) displays the storage area at the address
located at hexadecimal offset 0.
Method 5
Since CICS control block changes have made it increasingly difficult to chain through a
tasks storage areas, Xpediter/CICS has provided a Task Storage screen (2.S) shown in
Figure 16-5 on page 16-5 that allows you to easily display the areas on a tasks USER31,
USER24, CICS31, and CICS24 DSA chains. You can request any or all of these chains and
allocated and/or freemained areas. You can then select a specific area by entering an S in
the SEL column next to the desired area. Xpediter will transfer to the Memory Display
screen (2.2 or 9.2, based on Xpediter session type). The END command (default PF3) will
return you to the list of storage areas on the Task Storage screen with the last selected
area positioned on the top line.
1. Access the Task Storage screen by entering the letter S on the Debugging Facilities
Menu (2) or by entering =2.S in the COMMAND field. You can also access this screen
as described in the section entitled Transferring Between Screens in Chapter 2 of
the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
The Task Storage screen (Figure 16-5 on page 16-5) will be displayed with storage for
the current task (the default) showing all allocated areas on all four of the DSA
chains. You can vary the task selected and/or the combination of allocated and/or
freemained areas on the four DSA chains. Only freed areas still on the chains are
availablenot all areas freed anytime during the duration of the transaction. It
should also be noted that areas on the freemained chains may occasionally be
allocated by CICS while Xpediter is processing your viewing request.
Figure 16-5. Task Storage Screen (2.S)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - TASK STORAGE DISPLAY (2.S) -------------C123


TCA ADDRESS: 0005D080 TASK NUMBER: 00048
SELECT STORAGE CHAIN BELOW A - ALLOCATED F - FREEMAINED B - BOTH
_ ALL _ USER31 _ USER24 _ CICS31 _ CICS24

TYPE STORAGE ELEMENT ELEMENT
SEL ADDRESS LENGTH DATA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ U24 0022F9B8 00008020 11C15EE4D740F300 0000000000000000 *.A;UP 3.........*
_ U24 0022F938 00000070 8C00006C00000000 6000001400004000 *...%....-..... .*
_ U24 0022F908 00000020 0000000000000000 C3E6C4C5D4C3C2F2 *........CWDEMCB2*
_ U24 0022E478 00000300 000002F880000000 0000000000000000 *...8............*
_ U24 0022D2B8 000011B0 40D3E5E311B00001 0000000000000000 * LVT............*
_ U24 0022CE38 00000470 C3C5C5D7C3C24040 0303059897904898 *CEEPCB ...QP..Q*
_ U24 00204448 000289E0 C3C5C5C5C4C24040 C000000200205448 *CEEEDB {.......*
_ U24 00204008 00000430 00B46EC4C6C8C5C9 E4E2404040404040 *..>DFHEIUS *
_ C31 1784F138 00000120 01206EE3C1C3C240 0000000000001846 *..>TACB ........*
_ C31 1784F008 00000120 01206EE3C1C3C240 1784F13800001846 *..>TACB .D1.....*
_ U31 F 17A1A4A8 000E5B50 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 *................*
_ U24 F 00238208 00000010 8500001000000000 00040000110602C2 *E..............B*
_ U24 F 002385F8 000000F0 8500001300000000 0007000011010EE4 *E..............U*
2. Select the area you want to view by typing an S in the SEL column of the desired area
and pressing Enter. The Memory Display screen (2.2 or 9.2, based on Xpediter session
type) will be displayed. The first 16 bytes of the areas are displayed in hex and
character mode to make selection easier.
3. After viewing and/or updating an area, use the END command (default PF3) to return
to the Task Storage screen. The last area selected will be positioned on the top line.
4. You can page through the remaining areas, selecting and viewing any of interest.
Only one area can be selected at a time.
You can also use the LOCATE command with a hex address to determine whether an
address is contained in any of the areas on the selected chains. If it is, that area will
be positioned at the top of the screen, and you can select it to view the entire area.
Displaying CICS Table Entries

In this example, you will display several CICS table areas by using the TABLE ENTRY ID
field of the Storage Areas screen to access a specific table entry directly.
1. Type FCT (for file control table) in the TABLE/AREA field of the Memory Display
screen (2.2) (Figure 16-6).
2. Type DBUGEMP in the TABLE ENTRY ID field. DBUGEMP is a file used in the
Xpediter/CICS demonstration programs.
3. Press Enter to display the FCT entry for file DBUGEMP.
Note: If your file resource definition does not exist, after you type FCT in the
TABLE/AREA field, you see the message shown in Figure 16-7 on page 16-6.
Figure 16-6. Displaying the FCT on the Memory Display Screen (2.2)

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: FCT TABLE ENTRY ID: DBUGEMP
ADDRESS: 38377D98 HEX OFFSET: _______________________________

00000000 000 C4C2E4C7 C5D4D740 00000000 00000000 * DBUGEMP ........ * 38377D98
00000010 010 00000000 01348206 80004405 04000000 * ......b......... * 38377DA8
00000020 020 00000000 40400000 00800000 00000000 * .... .......... * 38377DB8
00000030 030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00004FB5 * ..............|. * 38377DC8
00000040 040 0000414C 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ...<............ * 38377DD8
00000050 050 00000000 C05AA9F7 DB885E04 00000000 * ....{!z7.h;..... * 38377DE8
00000060 060 38376AC0 38376AC0 381512C0 00000000 * ..{..{...{.... * 38377DF8
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 38377E08
00000080 080 00008004 00000000 00000000 00020002 * ................ * 38377E18
00000090 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000050 * ...............& * 38377E28
000000A0 0A0 00000000 00030002 3815B170 40000000 * ............ ... * 38377E38
000000B0 0B0 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 * ........ * 38377E48
000000C0 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 38377E58
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 38377E68
000000E0 0E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 38377E78
000000F0 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 38377E88
Figure 16-7. Invalid Table Entry ID Message

MODULE: ***************** INVALID TABLE ENTRY ID ******************
USE CONTENTS: _ ADD OFFSET: _____ CDSA

00000000 000 00000198 0004B020 3B985200 B797DD66 * ...q..^..q...p.. * 0004FA18
00000010 010 80D3E6E0 80800000 3817D030 38123DA0 * .LW\......}..... * 0004FA28
00000020 020 00000000 38119480 0000010C 00000000 * ......m......... * 0004FA38
00000030 030 B797D8AC 384B3360 3817D030 383674D0 * .pQ....-..}....} * 0004FA48
00000040 040 00054AD0 37E01080 0010020C 37E08080 * ..}.\.......\.. * 0004FA58
00000050 050 1048297F 3744A100 00000100 00000000 * ..."..~......... * 0004FA68
00000060 060 003B5F21 00000000 00090830 0000E906 * .............Z. * 0004FA78
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 7FFFFFFF 0107087F * ........"......" * 0004FA88
00000090 090 00000225 00000000 001E001E E707E764 * ............X.X. * 0004FAA8
000000B0 0B0 B75FEC14 00055228 37E01080 00000000 * ........\...... * 0004FAC8
000000C0 0C0 0005E680 60000000 0004F2A0 00000000 * ..W.-.....2..... * 0004FAD8
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 0004FAE8
000000E0 0E0 0000020C 000C0000 02000000 373767DC * ................ * 0004FAF8
000000F0 0F0 0000007A 37376890 0000007B 00000000 * ...:.......#.... * 0004FB08
Displaying Program and Transaction Resources

CICS no longer supports the use of the PCT and PPT table entry keywords. You may
access the CICS Resources screen (2.R) to view the attributes of a program or transaction.
If you do request a PCT entry for XCB2, control automatically passes to the CICS
Resources screen (2.R) shown in Figure 16-8. From the CICS Resources screen (2.R), you
may view the formatted resource information for your program or transaction.
Figure 16-8. CICS Resources Screen (2.R)
--------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - CICS RESOURCES (2.R) ----------------C123

COMMAND ===>
MODULE: ********* CICS RESOURCES SCREEN REPLACES PPT/PCT **********

RESOURCE TYPES: PROGram TRANsaction DB2Conn DB2Entry DB2Tran

RESOURCE TYPE: TRANSACTION RESOURCE NAME: XCB2

BREXIT: RESSEC: NO
CMDSEC: NO ROUTING: STATIC
DTIMEOUT: 0 ROUTESTATUS: NOTROUTABLE
DUMPING: YES RTIMEOUT: 0
FACILITYLIKE: RUNAWAY: 20000
INDOUBT: BACKOUT RUNAWAYTYPE: SYSTEM
INDOUBTMINS: 0 SCRNSIZE: DEFAULT
INDOUBTWAIT: WAIT SHUTDOWN: DISABLED
ISOLATEST: YES STATUS: ENABLED
OTSTIMEOUT: 0 STORAGECLEAR: NO
PRIORITY: 1 TASKDATAKEY: USERKEY
PROFILE: DFHCICST TASKDATALOC: BELOW
PROGRAM: CWDEMCB2 TRACING: STANDARD
PURGEABILITY: NO TRANCLASS: DFHTCL00
REMOTENAME: TRPROF:
REMOTESYSTEM: TWASIZE: X'00000000'
Reviewing the Select Address List

Xpediter/CICS keeps track of storage areas that were accessed during a debugging session
by saving the address of the areas in a circular list.
1. To display the Select Address screen, position the cursor in any area of the Memory
Display screen (2.2) except the data display and press PF15. The Select Address screen
appears as shown in Figure 16-9.
This list is used to review a debugging session without having to recreate the session.
Notice that all the table areas accessed on the Memory Display screen (2.2) in the
previous sections of this chapter are listed here.
Figure 16-9. Select Address Screen
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - SELECT ADDRESS -------------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

LINE COMMANDS: L (Lock) S (Select) U (Unlock)

CMD LABEL ADDRESS OFFSET AREA ENTRY ID FIRST 16 BYTES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ________ 00052080 TCA * .........M...... *
________ 0004BA00 ADDR * ................ *
_ ________ 00000000 * ................ *
_ ________ 00045570 CSA * ...Y....... .... *
_ ________ 000001E8 ADDR * ................ *
_ ________ 0AAA5490 FCT DBUGEMP * DBUGEMP ........ *
2. Type S in the CMD column next to the desired address to review any of these screens.
3. Press Enter to display the Memory Display screen (2.2) (Figure 16-10).
Figure 16-10. Memory Display Screen (2.2) from the Select Address Screen

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: TCA TABLE ENTRY ID: ________

00000000 000 37E08180 00000001 383674D0 0004F2A0 * .\a........}..2. * 37E08080
00000010 010 380A8FB0 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ...^............ * 37E08090
00000020 020 0000332C 00000000 00000000 80084ABC * ............... * 37E080A0
00000030 030 384B3360 0000088A 008A8000 3960005C * ...-.........-.* * 37E080B0
00000040 040 80240084 00082114 380A9878 B7856600 * ...d......q..e.. * 37E080C0
00000050 050 380A8FB0 378575FF 00000014 01024200 * ...^.e.......... * 37E080D0
00000060 060 00000040 383674D0 00000000 00000000 * ... ...}........ * 37E080E0
00000070 070 00000000 00000000 00000000 383674D0 * ...............} * 37E080F0
00000080 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08100
00000090 090 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08110
000000A0 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08120
000000B0 0B0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08130
000000C0 0C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08140
000000D0 0D0 00000000 00102018 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08150
000000E0 0E0 8004FA18 00102080 37EBD818 008A6000 * ..........Q...-. * 37E08160
000000F0 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 37E08170
4. Press PF11. The next area on the select list is displayed.

The list is especially useful for checking on possible errors during a debugging
session. You can review several screens and display additional storage areas. These
new areas are also saved in the list.
Because the Select Address screen is a circular list, Xpediter/CICS removes the oldest
entries when there are more than 16 addresses in it. If you need to retain a particular
entry, use the L (Lock) line command to lock an entry on the list. Use the U (Unlock)
line command to free these entries. Type these commands under the CMD column as
Figure 16-11. Address Entries
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - SELECT ADDRESS -------------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

LINE COMMANDS: L (Lock) S (Select) U (Unlock)

CMD LABEL ADDRESS OFFSET AREA ENTRY ID FIRST 16 BYTES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ________ 00052080 TCA * .........M...... *
L ________ 0004BA00 ADDR * ................ *
U ________ 00000000 * ................ *
_ ________ 00045570 CSA * ...Y....... .... *
_ ________ 000001E8 ADDR * ................ *
_ ________ 0AAA5490 FCT DBUGEMP * DBUGEMP ........ *
You can review the entire address list screen by using PF10 and PF11 to scroll through
the list, displaying the contents of memory at each of the addresses in the list. PF10
will display the previous address in the list, and PF11 will display the next address in
the list.
17-1
Chapter 17.
Using Global Storage Protection Chap 17
This chapter discusses the global storage protection facilities of Xpediter/CICS available
through the XPSP transaction. This chapter is intended for the person responsible for
maintaining the Xpediter/CICS system at the site. The chapter shows how to set region-
wide and automatic storage protection, and monitor storage violations. It also discusses
how to define system labels and storage exceptions.

Setting Region-Wide Storage Protection

Xpediter/CICS is designed to protect CICS regions against storage violations. You can set
storage protection for an entire region by individual program, transaction, terminal, or
any combination of these items. You can make entries to protect storage, fetch access,
shared storage, program storage, and storage by CICS command level commands or by
combining these items.
This example demonstrates how to set storage protection for a region through XPSP.
1. Type XPSP 9.8 from a blank CICS screen and press Enter to display the Storage
Protection screen (9.8) (Figure 17-1).
Figure 17-1. Making Storage Protection Entries on the Storage Protection Screen (9.8)

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000000

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ____ ____ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ____ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ____ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
2. Type SYST in the TYPE field. There are three types of storage protection entries:
SYST entries created by XPSP users or during product initialization. They always
proceed other entries in the table and are always evaluated first. These entries
can only be deleted by XPSP users.
USER entries follow SYST entries. They can be modified from either Storage
Protection screen (1.8 or 9.8).
AUTO entries are automatically added to the table whenever automatic storage
protection is set ON and any Xpediter/CICS transaction is used. See Setting
Automatic Storage Protection on page 17-2 for more information.
3. Type an asterisk (*) in the TERM field to specify all terminals.
4. Type XC** in the TRAN field to specify any transaction that begins with the letters
XC.
5. Type CWDEMCB2 in the PROGRAM field.
6. Type Y in the STORE field under PROTECTION OPTIONS.
7. Press Enter to redisplay the Storage Protection screen (9.8). Xpediter/CICS uses the
default value of NO for FETCH, SHR, PGM, and CMD Store.
These entries indicate that the program CWDEMCB2 is prevented from attempting to
cause storage violations whenever it is invoked from any terminal with a transaction
that starts with the letters XC.
Sample Storage Protection Entries

The settings shown in Figure 17-2 can be used to ensure that all transactions are
monitored for storage violations, yet allow Xpediter/CICS users to tailor their own
storage protection. Entries are searched in the order in which they appear in the
table. This entry should be the last one in the tableall other users entries precede
this one.
Figure 17-2. Monitoring Transactions on the Storage Protection Screen (9.8)

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ USER **** **** ******** YES NO NO NO NO
The settings shown in Figure 17-3 turn off monitoring without destroying the
current table entries. These settings must appear first in the table.
Figure 17-3. Turning Off Monitoring on the Storage Protection Screen (9.8)

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ SYST **** **** ******** NO NO NO NO NO
Setting Automatic Storage Protection

Xpediter/CICS is shipped with the storage protection function turned OFF for all three
transactions (XPED, XPRT, and XPSP). Although these settings prevent Xpediter/CICS
from intercepting storage violations, they may be acceptable for several reasons. First, if
applications are run in test regions, the impact of storage violations is probably not as
great as in a production environment. Second, storage monitoring requires additional
system resources to inspect each instruction before it executes. Thus, in most cases, the
need for protection is less than the cost of providing protection. In these cases, storage
protection should be turned OFF.
Using Global Storage Protection 17-3
Note: If Xpediter/CICS is operating in Utilities Mode or Diagnosis/Utilities Mode, the

storage protection function is not available, regardless of global table parameter
settings or attempted user overrides. These modes are designed for use in
throughput-critical CICS regions.
Activating Test Region Storage Protection

There are times when you cant afford to expose your test region to outages caused by
storage violations. This is the time to change the default so that storage protection is
automatically turned ON whenever a test session is started.
The PROTECT field on the Set Profile Defaults screen (0.1) controls automatic storage
protection. The SET PROTECT command can be used to change the PROTECT field
without visiting the 0.1 screen. When PROTECT is set to ON for any Xpediter/CICS
transaction, the STORE protection option is automatically provided whenever a user
enters that transaction. Additional protection options can be set by using the Storage
Protection screen (1.8 or 9.8).
The global parameter DEFPROT (default OFF,OFF,OFF) determines the initial defaults for
a new user profile. For example, setting DEFPROT to (ON,OFF,OFF) automatically sets the
PROTECT field ON if the XPED transaction is used or OFF if the XPRT or XPSP
transaction is used.
Allowing Storage Violations

Xpediter/CICS storage protection rules are very strict. Only storage that belongs to the
program can be updated. Anything else is intercepted as a violation. There are times
when an application programmer may disagree with the Xpediter/CICS assessment of
what is a violation. With the ALLOW command, you can allow the trapped violation to
occur, yet still provide protection for the rest of the test.
The ALLOWCM global parameter controls access to the ALLOW command when using
Xpediter/CICS transactions. Xpediter/CICS is shipped with ALLOW set to OFF (no) for
the XPED/XPRT transactions and ON (yes) for the XPSP transaction. Xpediters three-
transaction design gives you the ability to control who has access to allow storage
violations by turning ALLOWCM ON for one transaction and OFF for the others.
Note: For more information about the global parameters, refer to the Xpediter/CICS
Installation and Configuration Guide.
Defining System Labels

Defining storage exceptions is another way to allow non-destructive storage violations to
occur. Many sites have in-house or vendor-supplied programs that break the rules for
storage protection. To avoid having storage violations reported for this activity,
Xpediter/CICS provides two screens to define, label, and exempt certain areas from
storage protection. Xpediter/CICS can then monitor a program for storage violations, yet
define areas that are exempt from storage violation protection. With this facility, your
program can modify areas without Xpediter/CICS considering the modification to be a
storage violation.
The Define System Labels screen (9.9) is used to define areas to be exempted from storage
protection.
1. Type =9.9 in the COMMAND field of any screen and press Enter to display the Define
System Labels screen (9.9) (Figure 17-4).
In this example, assume that program CWDEMCB2 needs to modify the TRAN ID
field of the execute interface block (EIB). Identify and label the field as EIBTRNID to
exempt it from storage protection.
The TRAN ID field is located in the EIB. Two entries are made: one to locate the start
of the EIB (EISEIBAD), the second to locate the TRAN ID field within the EIB
(EIBTRNID).
Note: Program CWDEMCB2 is used here only as an example. It does not actually
update the EIB.
Figure 17-4. Define System Labels Screen (9.9)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DEFINE SYSTEM LABELS (9.9) -------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

DEFAULT BASE LABELS: CSA DCT EIS FCT MOD OFL PGM TCA TCT
ADDR PADDR PLEN INITCOMM MQMD MQDATA

USER BASE ENTRY OR + OR - USE RESULTING
DEL LABEL LABEL PGM-NAME OFFSET CONTENT LENGTH VALUE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
2. To locate the starting address of the EIB, type EISEIBAD in the USER LABEL field.
This defines a label for the beginning of the EIB.
3. Type EIS in the BASE LABEL field.
4. Type 8 in the + OR - OFFSET field. This value is the offset from the beginning of the
EIS where the EIB address is located.
5. Type Y in the USE CONTENT field to specify that the data located eight bytes into
the EIS is to be used as an address.
6. Type 4 in the LENGTH field to indicate the length of the area to be used.
7. Press Enter. The first entry is recorded.
8. Type MYTRANID in the USER LABEL field. This identifies the EIBTRNID.
9. Type EISEIBAD in the BASE LABEL field. This is the label defined in step 2.
10. Type 8 in the + OR - OFFSET field.
11. Type N in the USE CONTENT field to indicate that the data found at this address is
not to be used as an address.
12. Type 4 in the LENGTH field.
13. Press Enter. If the addresses can be resolved, the RESULTING VALUE field is updated
as shown in Figure 17-5. All addresses and lengths are resolved at the time they are
used.
Figure 17-5. EIB Entries on Define System Labels Screen (9.9)
------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DEFINE SYSTEM LABELS (9.9) -------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

DEFAULT BASE LABELS: CSA DCT EIS FCT MOD OFL PGM TCA TCT
ADDR PADDR PLEN INITCOMM MQMD MQDATA

USER BASE ENTRY OR + OR - USE RESULTING
DEL LABEL LABEL PGM-NAME OFFSET CONTENT LENGTH VALUE
--- -------- -------- -------- --------- --- -------- --------
_ EISEIBAD EIS 8 Y 00000004 385000D0
_ MYTRANID EISEIBAD 8 N 00000004 385000D8
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
_ ________ ________ ________ _________ _ ________
Defining Storage Exceptions

Now that you have identified and labeled the MYTRANID field, you can make an entry to
exempt this area from storage protection. The next entry allows program CWDEMCB2 to
update this field.
1. Type =9.7 in the COMMAND field and press Enter to access the Storage Exceptions
screen. The following steps will create the entry seen in Figure 17-6.
Figure 17-6. Exceptions Entered on the Storage Exceptions Screen (9.7)
------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - STORAGE EXCEPTIONS (9.7) --------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:

ADDRESS ADDR-TO <-- ALLOW ALLOW UNPRO
DEL TERM TRAN PROGRAM FROM OR LNTH A/L STORE FETCH INSTR
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ **** **** CWDEMCB2 MYTRANID 4 L YES NO NO
385000D8 385000DB
_ ____ ____ ________ ________ ________ _ ___ ___ ___

_ ____ ____ ________ ________ ________ _ ___ ___ ___

_ ____ ____ ________ ________ ________ _ ___ ___ ___
2. Type an asterisk (*) in the TERM field to specify all terminals.

3. Type an asterisk (*) in the TRAN field to specify all transactions.
4. Type CWDEMCB2 in the PROGRAM field.
5. Type MYTRANID in the ADDRESS FROM field.
6. Type 4 in the ADDR-TO OR LNTH field.
7. Type L (for length) in the A/L field.
8. Type Y in the ALLOW STORE field.
9. Press Enter. The default value NO is taken for ALLOW FETCH and UNPRO INSTR.
These entries specify that whenever CWDEMCB2 is executed from any terminal or
transaction, it can modify the four-byte area beginning at the label EIBTRNID.
When evaluated with storage protection active, Xpediter/CICS monitors CWDEMCB2 for
storage violations but allows updates to the TRAN ID field.
Note: Entries made on the Storage Exceptions screen (9.7), the Storage Protection screen
(9.8), and the Define System Labels screen (9.9) stay in effect until they are
deleted or Xpediter is turned off.
Remember to end your session as described in Exiting Xpediter/CICS and Ending a

Monitoring Storage Violations

Xpediter/CICS can monitor storage violations in either interactive or unattended mode.
In interactive mode, the storage violation is intercepted at either the users terminal, or a
system or help desk terminal. The problem can be reviewed and fixed, or a dump can be
requested. In either case, the storage violation is prevented. In unattended mode, the
storage violation is intercepted and turned into a harmless abend. Information is passed
to the dump dataset with an abend code of ASRA, or to the Abend-AID for CICS Report
file with an abend code of STOR.
The following examples show how to set up interactive and unattended monitoring.
Interactive Monitoring
1. Type XPSP 9.6 and press Enter on a blank CICS screen to display the Trap Summary
screen (9.6) shown in Figure 17-7. This screen is used to specify the programs,
transactions, userIDs, netnames, and terminals to be monitored for abends. Entries
that have your terminal ID in the TRAP BY field will be intercepted by your terminal.
You can set traps for Web-based and other transactions using Xpediters enhanced
trap conditions. For more information, see the explanation of the Trap Summary
screen (9.6) in the Xpediter/CICS Reference Manual.
2. Type XCB2 in the TRAN field and press Enter to set a trap. The XCB2 transaction will
be intercepted whenever an abend occurs. See Figure 17-7. If global parameter
TRAPTRM is set to YES (the default), your terminal ID will be displayed in the TERM
field, and you must overtype it with asterisks (*).
Figure 17-7. Setting an Abend Trap on the Trap Summary Screen (9.6)

MODULE: CSECT:
M (Move) S (Save)

IF ...................... TRAP CONDITION ....................... TRAP BY
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ ******** ******** **** XCB2 ******** YES
IF 0072
_ ________ ________ ____ ____ ________ ___
IF
3. To set a protection entry, type =9.8 and press Enter. The Storage Protection screen
(9.8) appears as shown in Figure 17-8.
Figure 17-8. Storage Protection Screen (9.8)

MODULE: CSECT:
ENTRY 000001

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ SYST **** XCB2 ******** YES NO NO NO NO
_ ____ ____ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
_ ____ ____ ____ ________ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
4. Type SYST in the TYPE field.

5. Type an asterisk (*) in the TERM field.
6. Type XCB2 in the TRAN field.
7. Type an asterisk (*) in the PROGRAM field.
8. Type YES in the PROTECT STORE field and press Enter. This entry means that any
storage violation in any program executed by transaction XCB2 will be intercepted.
9. Press Clear.
10. Using another terminal, sign on to the same CICS region.
11. On a blank CICS screen, type XCB2 and press Enter.
12. Type 00333 and press Enter. Your terminal will hang as shown in Figure 17-9.
Figure 17-9. Storage Violation on the Demonstration Transaction Screen


Note: The Source Listing screen (2.L) may be displayed in the following step if
source support has been turned on for the XPSP transaction.
13. Return to the original terminal. The Break/Abend screen (2.1) will be displayed with
a message that a storage violation has occurred, as shown in Figure 17-10.
Figure 17-10. Intercepting a Storage Violation on the Break/Abend Screen (2.1)
---------------------- XPEDITER/CICS - BREAK/ABEND (2.1) ------------------C123

MODULE: CWDEMCB2 ***************** SUBSCRIPT OUT OF BOUNDS *****************
CAUSE: OVERLAPPING END STORG CHECK ZONE(PR) ABEND CODE: STOR
TRAN ID: XCB2 PARAGRAPH: 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP
INTERRUPT STMT: 000559 OFFSET: 01C0A LAST CICS COMMAND:
RESUME STMT : 000559 OFFSET: 01BFA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
000557 MOVE +1 TO LS-SUBSCRIPT.
000558 1060-INITIALIZE-STORAGE-LOOP.
000559 MOVE 'V' TO LS-FIELD-WITH-1 (LS-SUBSCRIPT).
000561 1 GO TO 1080-INITIALIZATION-DONE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02 LS-FIELD-WITH-1 X(1) V
OCCURS 16 TIMES 1
77 LS-SUBSCRIPT S9(3) COMP-3 +017
**END**
Notice the error message on this screen indicates a STOR violation (OVERLAPPING
END STORG CHECK ZONE).
At this point, you have access to all Xpediter/CICS screens and can use them to
investigate the problem. In this example, you will end the session.
14. Type =X in the COMMAND field and press Enter. The Exit Session screen is displayed
as shown in Figure 17-11.
The ACTIVE ABEND TRAPS and WAITING TASKS fields show the number of remote
traps.
Figure 17-11. Removing Abend Trap and the Exit Session Screen (X)

COMMAND ===>


DUMP OPTION: NO YES forces a dump (or Abend-AID for CICS report) for



15. Type Y in the END SESSION field and press Enter. This frees the remote terminal and
removes the trap set on the Trap Summary screen (9.6).
Unattended Monitoring
On the secondary terminal, type XCB2 and press Enter. The storage violation is
intercepted and turned into a harmless ASRA, as shown in Figure 17-12. The dump
information is stored on the dump dataset. If Abend-AID for CICS is installed, an
abend report is created with an abend code of STOR.
Figure 17-12. Preventing a Storage Violation on the Demonstration Transaction Screen



DFHAC2206 13:03:48 H01AC123 TRANSACTION XCB2 FAILED WITH ABEND ASRA. UPDATES
TO LOCAL RECOVERABLE RESOURCES BACKED OUT.
Setting Storage Protection during PLT Startup

Storage protection entries can be defined at product initialization. For information on
this procedure, refer to the Xpediter/CICS Installation and Configuration Guide.
18-1
Chapter 18.
Editing CICS Tables and Control Blocks Chap 18
This chapter discusses how to use the XPSP transaction to perform the following
functions:
Access and modify CICS table entries, storage, and control blocks defined to a CICS
region.
Use Xpediter/CICS to modify CICS tables online without taking the region down.

Editing a CICS Table Entry

The following scenario demonstrates how to edit a CICS table entry on either the
Memory Display screen (9.2) or the DSECTs screen (9.D).
Note: This scenario applies to VTAM terminals only.
Note: Because the example removes upper case translation by overtyping a field in the
TCT, causing CICS not to recognize a lower case transaction name, you may want
to just read the example without actually replacing the value.
Editing from the Memory Display Screen

Use the Memory Display screen (9.2) to update tables in hexadecimal dump format:
1. From a blank CICS screen, type XPSP 9.2 and press Enter. The Memory Display
screen (9.2) is displayed (Figure 18-1).
Figure 18-1. Changing the TCT on the Memory Display Screen (9.2)

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: TCT TABLE ENTRY ID: 0751
ADDRESS: 383704D0 HEX OFFSET: +0000006B______________________

CCSID TYPE: EBCDIC
0000006B 000 013835C5 703817E0 30000000 00381777 * ...E...\........ * 3837053B
0000007B 010 D8000000 00384B50 00000000 00000000 * Q......&........ * 3837054B
0000008B 020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3837055B
0000009B 030 00381720 30000205 00010000 00000000 * ................ * 3837056B
000000AB 040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00008400 * ..............d. * 3837057B
000000BB 050 00000000 05000000 06000000 00000400 * ................ * 3837058B
000000CB 060 00000000 00800000 00000000 0000C000 * ..............{. * 3837059B
000000DB 070 00000000 00000000 0C010000 00000000 * ................ * 383705AB
000000EB 080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 383705BB
000000FB 090 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 383705CB
0000010B 0A0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 383705DB
0000011B 0B0 00000000 00000084 00000500 08000000 * .......d........ * 383705EB
0000012B 0C0 00000000 00000000 00FFFF00 00000000 * ................ * 383705FB
0000013B 0D0 00000000 00C05E1F CAB91F9E 84000000 * .....{;.....d... * 3837060B
0000014B 0E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3837061B
0000015B 0F0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ * 3837062B
2. Type TCT in the TABLE/AREA field.

3. Type TCTEUCTB in the HEX OFFSET field and press Enter.
4. Look at the data display area. The upper case translation byte value is 01. To turn off
upper case translation, position the cursor to the first position displayed, change the
01 to 00, and press Enter.
Note: You may want to change the value back to 01 before ending your session.
The table has been updated, and you can now continue your test without recycling
the CICS region.
Editing from the DSECTs Screen

You can also edit table entries using the DSECTs screen (9.D). This screen provides a way
for you to display and update DSECTs online as shown in the following example:
1. Type XPSP 9.D from a blank CICS screen and press Enter.
2. Type TCT in the TABLE/AREA field.
3. Type TCTEUCTB in the LABEL field and press Enter. The TCTEUCTB field is
displayed (Figure 18-2).
Editing CICS Tables and Control Blocks 18-3
Figure 18-2. DSECTs Screen (9.D)
------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - DSECTS (9.D) ---------------------C123

MODULE: CSECT:
TABLE/AREA: TCT TABLE ENTRY ID: 0751
LABEL: TCTEUCTB

3837053B 06B TCTEUCTB DS XL1 01 * . *
3837053C 06C TCTENIBA DS 0C
3837053C 06C TCTTEGU DS 0C
3837053C 06C TCTTERLA DS 0C
3837053C 06C TCTTETA DS XL4 3835C570 * ..E. *
38370540 070 TCTTESKA DS 0C
38370540 070 TCTERPLA DS 0C
38370540 070 TCTTELEA DS XL4 3817E030 * ..\. *
38370544 074 TCTTERST DS XL4 00000000 * .... *
38370548 078 TCTTETEA DS XL4 381777D8 * ...Q *
3837054C 07C TCTTETC DS XL4 00000000 * .... *
38370550 080 TCTEEILR DS XL4 384B5000 * ..&. *
38370554 084 TCTTESUA DS 0C
38370554 084 TCTEEIEX DS XL4 00000000 * .... *
38370558 088 TCTTEEIA DS XL4 00000000 * .... *
3837055C 08C TCTTECTK DS XL4 00000000 * .... *
38370560 090 TCTTECHN DS XL1 00 * . *
TCTECHAN EQU X'80'
You can change this field (01) by keying over the existing data in either hexadecimal or
character format.
This same technique can be used to update any table, control block, or area defined to
the CICS region.
19-1
Chapter 19.
Using 3270 Web Bridge Support Chap 19
This chapter demonstrates how to run Xpediter/CICS using the 3270 Web Bridge
function. Some typical Xpediter screens are shown, and any minor differences associated
with running Xpediter using the 3270 Web Bridge are noted.
You will use the XPED transaction in a web browser window to test the sample
application transaction XCB2 and fix an abend. XCB2 is a simple employee payroll
transaction that executes the COBOL program CWDEMCB2. The XCB2 transaction is
used throughout this chapter to cause several types of abends. (Although COBOL is used
in these examples, the same scenarios apply for all languages.)
This demonstration assumes your CICS region is configured to allow transactions to be

run in a web browser window using the 3270 Web Bridge.

Running Xpediter/CICS Using the 3270 Web Bridge

1. In the Address field of your web browser, type the URL for your CICS region,
including the port number, followed by /CICS/CWBA/DFHWBTTC/XPED and press
Enter. The Xpediter/CICS Primary Menu will appear as shown in Figure 19-1. Input
fields appear as text entry boxes, and buttons are provided for standard 3270
terminal keys. Button labels are based on the LABEL column values in your profile.
Figure 19-1. Xpediter/CICS Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT) Using 3270 Web Bridge
Notes:
If Xpediter has not yet been initialized in the CICS region, you will be prompted to
click the browser Refresh button before the Primary Menu appears.
The browser progress indicator bar does not complete.
The browser Back button may yield unpredictable results when using the 3270 Web
Bridge.
2. Click the CLEAR button in the browser window. Clicking this button takes the place
of pressing the Clear key. A blank CICS screen appears as shown in Figure 19-2.
Using 3270 Web Bridge Support 19-3
Figure 19-2. Entering XCB2 on a Blank CICS Screen
3. Type XCB2 in the blank CICS screen and click the Enter button. Clicking this button
takes the place of pressing the Enter key. The Demonstration Transaction screen
appears (Figure 19-3).
4. To cause an ASRA abend, type 00001 for the employee number and click the Enter
button.
The CWDEMCB2 demonstration transaction program is intercepted, and the Source
Listing screen (2.L) appears as shown in Figure 19-4.
Using 3270 Web Bridge Support 19-5
Figure 19-4. Source Listing Screen (2.L) Showing an ASRA
5. Note the value of WA_HOURS. The bad data ($$$) in this field is causing the ASRA.
To change it, select the bad data, type 040, then click the ENTER button.
6. Click the GO button to continue the test. The Demonstration Transaction screen
appears as shown in Figure 19-5.
Figure 19-5. Demonstration Transaction Completed

G-1
Glossary Basic Partitioned Access Method (BPAM). File

access method that can be applied to create pro-
gram libraries, in direct access storage, for conve-
nient storage and retrieval of programs.
AADF. Transaction used to access Abend-AID for
CICS to view reports. batch. Processing in which jobs are grouped
(batched). The jobs are executed sequentially, and
abend. Abnormal end of task. The termination of each job must be processed to completion before
a task, prior to normal completion, due to an the following job can begin execution.
unresolved error condition.
BDAM. Basic Direct Access Method.
Abend-AID for CICS. System software product
designed to analyze the cause of CICS transaction BK-CHAIN. Back chain pointer.
abends. It provides online diagnostics that explain
the cause of the abend, the location within the blank. Part of a data medium in which no charac-
program where the error occurred, and how to cor- ters are recorded. Its hexadecimal character repre-
rect the problem. sentation is X40.
abend code. Identifier for the current abend BL cell. Base Locator cell. These cells are used by
when an abend occurs. COBOL programs to provide addressability to data
within the working storage section of a program.
Abend trap. Function that allows Xpediter/CICS
to notify the user when a program breakpoint, BLL cell. Base Linkage Locator cell. These cells
abend, or storage violation has been encountered. are used by COBOL programs to provide address-
See trap. ability to data within the linkage section of a pro-
gram.
ADD OFFSET. Indicates a specific screen location.
The data at this location is scrolled to the top of BLW cell. Base Locator Working Storage cell.
the data portion of the screen. If the USE These cells are used by COBOL II programs to pro-
ADDRESS field contains an X, Xpediter/CICS vide addressability to data within the working
uses the data at this location as an address and dis- storage section of a program.
plays the location indicated. This feature is found
on screens 2.2 and 9.2. BPAM. Basic Partitioned Access Method.
ADDRESS. Address that is displayed on hexadeci- breakpoint. Xpediter/CICS method of pausing

mal dump format screens and indicates the begin- program execution during debugging. Setting a
ning address of the area being accessed. The breakpoint in a program halts execution of the
address does not change unless: program when a statement is about to be exe-
cuted. Breakpoints may be set as conditional or
A new area is accessed unconditional and to occur either before or after
The programmer types over the address with a the event.
location to be accessed
The USE CONTENTS field is used to retrieve At a breakpoint, the user may view all the tables
data from a stored location. and areas necessary to solve a problem. After inter-
rogating the problem, the user may continue nor-
Assembler language processor. One of several mal execution of the system.
language processors provided by Compuware, this
language processor accepts Assembler output, channel. Analogous to a parameter list. Contain-
builds sort work records, sorts and merges the ers are grouped together in sets called channels.
records, and merges the records with the listing to
produce processor control blocks that can then be CICS. Customer Information Control System.
used as input to Xpediter/CICS and other Compu-
ware products. C language processor. One of several language
processors provided by Compuware, this language
Basic Direct Access Method (BDAM). File access processor accepts C output, builds sort work
method that directly retrieves or updates specified records, sorts and merges the records, and merges
blocks of data on a direct access storage device. the records with the listing to produce processor
control blocks that can then be used as input to
G-2 Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
Xpediter/CICS and other Compuware products. Database Descriptor (DBD). Defines the data-
base associated with a PCB. Associated with every
CLC. Compare Logical Character. PSB is a list of PCBs that define databases that can
be accessed via a PSB. Each PCB-accessed database
CLOT. (DB2 only) CICS Life-of-Task block. can be identified by its DBD name, which is used
during the definition of the database to DL/I.
COBOL language processor. One of several lan-
guage processors provided by Compuware, this DA-UNB. Direct Access UNBlocked dataset.
language processor accepts COBOL compiler out-
put, builds sort work records, sorts and merges the DB2. An IBM relational database management
records, and merges the records with the listing to system.
produce processor control blocks that can then be
used as input to Xpediter/CICS and other Compu- DBD. DataBase Descriptor.
ware products.
DBPA. Transaction used to initiate certain Xpe-
command. Request from a terminal to perform diter/CICS functions at system start-up.
an operation or to execute a program.
DCT. Destination Control Table.
COMMAND field. Field that appears in the upper
left corner of most Xpediter/CICS screens. All Xpe- DDIO. A Compuware file access method.
diter/CICS functions and screens are selected by
entering the desired function or screen ID in the DDIO file. A generic name for an Abend-AID
COMMAND field. report file, or an Xpediter source listing file.
Compare Logical Character (CLC) instruction. DDIO file member. A generic name for an abend
report in an Abend-AID report file, or an Xpediter
An IBM machine compare instruction. source listing in a source listing file.
Compuware Shared Services (CSS). A set of default value. Choice among exclusive alterna-
components used by several Compuware products tives made by the system when no explicit choice
to provide storage, retrieval, and maintenance for is made by the user.
source listings and abend reports.
destination. Location at which a block of (lines)
Conditional breakpoint. For a statement set records or a single record is being copied or
with a conditional breakpoint, Xpediter/CICS moved. The destination can be specified with an A
interrogates the condition entered and if true, (After) or B (Before) line command.
halts execution of the program and receives con-
trol. Destination Control Table (DCT). A CICS table
describing transient data files.
Containers. The big commarea containers and
channels that IBM introduced in CICS Transaction DFHRPL. Library of CICS and user-written pro-
Server 3.1 to replace commareas. For additional grams that are loaded and executed as part of a
information, refer to IBMs CICS Information CICS system. Programs from this library are loaded
Center. into CICS storage for online execution. DFHRPL
may be supplemented by LIBRARY resource defini-
CSECT field. Field on most Xpediter/CICS tions.
screens that is used to change the CSECT to be
accessed during the session. DL/I. Data Language 1.
dataname. The name of the data item in the DMAP. Data division map of a COBOL program.
working storage section of a COBOL program. The DMAP COBOL compile option produces a
report of all datanames and their associated BL or
dataset. Collection of data treated as a unit that BLL cell, displacement within the cell, and field
is the primary unit of access and storage. It can be description.
organized in various ways.
DOS. Disk Operating System.
DA-KEY. BDAM blocked DAtaset, deblocked by
KEY. DSECT. Dummy control section. A control sec-
tion that an Assembler program can use to format
DA-REL. BDAM blocked DAtaset, deblocked by a an area of storage without producing any object
RELative record. code.
G-3
EDT. MVS Eligible Device Table. VIEW SINGLE TASK screen (9.1) and the LIST ALL
TASKS (9.3) screen.
EIB. Execute Interface Block.
IMS. Information Management System.
EIS. Execute Interface Storage.
INRWORK. INput Register Work area.
entry-sequenced dataset (ESDS). VSAM dataset
whose records are loaded in sequence. Unlike a interactive. Pertaining to an application in
normal sequential dataset, ESDS records can be which each entry calls forth a response from a sys-
accessed randomly by their addresses. tem or program.
ESDS. Entry-Sequenced Dataset. IP address. A numeric address given to servers

and users computers connected to the Internet.
external security manager (ESM). A security
product that provides an interface to the z/OS Sys- ISPF. Interactive System Productivity Facility.
tem Authorization Facility (SAF). CA-ACF2, RACF,
and CA-Top Secret are examples of ESMs. JCL. Job Control Language.
Execute Interface Block (EIB). Block that con- key. Code used to locate a record and establish its
tains information pertinent to a command-level position in an index. The key can be part of a
transaction such as the current time and date, field, a full field, or multiple fields duplicated
transaction ID, task number, terminal ID, COM- from the record.
MAREA length, attention identifier, function code,
and response code. Key-Sequenced Dataset (KSDS). VSAM file type
whose records are loaded in key sequence. Records
FCT. File Control Table. are retrieved by key or address using an index.
New records are inserted in key sequence by
file. Complete organized collection of informa- means of distributed free space.
tion.
keyword. Reserved word that has special signifi-
File Control Table (FCT). A CICS table defining cance.
files that can be accessed by CICS programs. Also
used to generically apply to files defined in the KSDS. Key-Sequenced DataSet.
CSD.
line command. Edit command that is entered
HELP. Primary command that requests Xpediters directly on the line to be processed by overtyping
interactive Help facility. the sequence number at the beginning of the line.
Also known as a prefix command.
HEX. Primary command that alternates between
symbolic or dump format display. linkage section. A section of a COBOL program
used to describe data that is passed to it from CICS
HEX OFFSET. Hexadecimal value of the location or another program.
of the retrieved area relative to the beginning of
the address. The sum of the ADDRESS field and MENU. Primary command that ends the current
HEX OFFSET field indicates the actual address of function and returns the user to the SYSTEM
the data displayed. MENU.
HEX ON and HEX OFF. Displays data in charac- MODULE field. Field on most Xpediter/CICS
ter and zoned decimal format on the VARIABLE screens that is used to change the program to be
STORAGE screen (2.3). The user may view this accessed during the session.
same data in a standard hexadecimal dump format
by entering HEX ON in the COMMAND field. HEX MORE. Indicates there is more information to
OFF redisplays the data in character and zoned display. This indicator appears only when screen
decimal format. overflow data is not generally assumed. Use PF7
and PF8 to view the additional data.
hung task. A task suspended by the system.
MQ. IBM licensed programs that provide message
hung task analysis. A Xpediter/CICS facility for queuing services.
the XPSP user that allows interrogation of a sus-
pended task to determine the reason for its sus- offset. A relative location or position within a
pension. This function is available by using the data area.
OFL. Optional Features List. Also known as OPFL. profile. Control block that defines session char-
acteristics applicable to one or more users of Xpe-
operating system. Software that controls the exe- diter/CICS. Pertinent information in a profile may
cution of jobs. It may provide resource allocation include PF key settings, default abend trap, trace,
and scheduling. storage protection, and footing settings.
OS. Operating System. profile dataset. VSAM KSDS dataset containing

all profiles available for use during a Xpe-
paragraph. Set of one or more COBOL sentences, diter/CICS session.
making a logical processing entity, and preceded
by a paragraph name or a paragraph header. program function (PF) key. Keyboard keys that
are numbered from PF1 to PF24 and are pro-
PCB. Program Communication Block. grammed to perform functions such as scrolling.
PLIST. (DB2 only) Parameter List. Program Status Word (PSW). A special control
register, in the hardware, defining the current sta-
PF key. Program Function Key. tus and location of a program that is executing.
PL/I language processor. One of several lan- PSB. Program Specification Block.
guage processors provided by Compuware, this
language processor accepts PL/I compiler output, PSW. Program Status Word.
builds sort work records and an incore symbol
table of all the identifiers, and produces processor quick table disable. Method of turning off stor-
control blocks that can then be used as input to age protection monitoring without destroying the
Xpediter/CICS and other Compuware products. current table entries.
PLT. Program List Table. RCT. (DB2 only) Resource Control Table.
prefix commands. Another name for line com- record. Collection of related data or words
mands. treated as a unit.
Program Communication Block (PCB). One of a register. Storage device, having specified storage
list of control blocks used by DL/I that define the capacity such as a bit, byte, or a computer word,
databases that can be accessed via a particular PSB. and usually intended for a special purpose.
Each PCB-accessed database DBD name. For each
PCB with a PSB, Xpediter/CICS displays the PCB register save area. Group of 72 contiguous bytes
number and DBD name. Xpediter/CICS uses the used for saving registers when one program calls
PCB number to identify the PCB to access a DL/I another.
database from the selected PSB.
Relative Record DataSet (RRDS). VSAM dataset
Program List Table (PLT). CICS table describing whose record locations are specified by a number
a list of programs to be executed when CICS is in that represents a records location in the dataset
initialization or termination processing. relative to the beginning of the dataset.
Program Specification Block (PSB). DL/I control remote task trapping. Xpediter/CICS function
block that defines a set of DL/I databases that can that allows one terminal to trap abends, break-
be accessed from a program. The databases and points, and storage violations that occur on
segments in the databases that can be accessed are another terminal or in a non-terminal task.
defined via a list of PCBs defined in the PSB. To
access any DL/I database, always select a PSB. RFN. An abbreviation for RECEIVE FROM NET-
WORK. RECEIVE FROM NETWORK specifies that
program storage. Class of CICS storage used for the input for an SMP/E RECEIVE command is a
application programs. GIMZIP package on a TCP/IP connected FTP
server.
primary command. Command that provides a
general function. Primary commands are entered RRDS. Relative Record Dataset.
in the COMMAND field.
screen ID. Code entered in the COMMAND field
procedure division. Section of a COBOL program to retrieve information and function screens. The
that contains executable instructions. SCREEN ID for each screen appears on every
screen immediately preceding the screen title.
G-5
SCROLL field. A field on most Xpediter/CICS table entry ID. Identification command used to
screens that is used to set the default value to be directly retrieve the desired CICS table entry for
used for those screens that allow scrolling. display.
Segment Search Argument (SSA). A control task. Execution of a program or multiple pro-
block used by DL/I to access a segment within the grams within CICS to perform a specific function.
hierarchy of a database. Each task is assigned a unique number (task num-
ber) by CICS.
Shared Directory. A variable-length record VSAM
RRDS that maintains information about abends TCA. Task Control Area.
and language processing along with the attached
database activity. A shared directory can contain TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Abend-AID for CICS directory records for each Protocol. Set of communication protocols
region and transaction dump known to a server, enabling Telnet, FTP, e-mail, and other services.
Abend-AID directory records for abend report pro-
cessing, or source listing shared directory records TCT. Terminal Control Table.
necessary to process source listing database mem-
bers. Terminal Control Table (TCT). CICS table defin-
ing terminals used by CICS.
shared storage. Class of CICS storage that can be
shared between tasks. TOGGLE. Primary command that transfers you to
the Source Listing (2.L) screen.
SIT. System Initialization Table.
trace. Record of the execution of a computer pro-
snap dump. Dump that is taken at a specific gram; it exhibits the sequences in which the
point during execution of a program. Processing is instructions were executed.
generally continued after the dump has been
taken. trace table. CICS storage area into which trace
information is placed. This table contains the
SQLCA. (DB2 only) SQL Communication Area. chronological occurrences of events that take
place in CICS, recorded in wraparound fashion
SQLDA. (DB2 only) SQL Descriptor Area. within the trace table.
SSA. Segment Search Argument. trap. Xpediter/CICS feature. The user may set
traps to intercept CICS transaction abends and to
statement number. Sequence numbers provided view all areas at abend time. Traps may be set to
by compilers and assemblers to provide the pro- only intercept transaction abends at terminals
grammer with an easy means of identifying a running Xpediter/CICS or designated as remote.
statement within a program. Traps may be set to intercept specific transactions
abends, regardless of the terminal from where they
statement number column. Column on the dis- are executed. Traps may also be used to intercept
play where the statement numbers are located. In abends occurring in non-terminal tasks.
some cases, commands may be entered into this
column. TSA. Temporary Save Area.
STCA. System portion of the Task Control Area. unconditional breakpoint. For a statement set
with an unconditional breakpoint, Xpediter/CICS
stop. See breakpoint receives control and temporarily halts execution
of the program before or after this statement.
storage protection. Method of preventing pro-
grams from violating storage within the CICS use address. A feature that is available on the
region, thereby increasing the time that the region Memory Display screens (2.2 and 9.2). The USE
remains running. ADDRESS function automatically retrieves an
address reference from memory and displays the
storage protection exceptions. Xpediter/CICS location.
facility for allowing specific actions that are con-
sidered to be storage violations to take place. user labels. Labels generated by a user that
equate to storage locations.
system labels. Labels that equate to storage loca-
tions that may be used by any Xpediter/CICS user. variable. Name of a data item in a PL/I program.
Some system labels are predefined by Compuware.
view. Xpediter/CICS method of selecting data

items for display at a breakpoint or abend.
virtual storage. Storage space that may be

regarded as addressable main storage by the user
of a computer system in which virtual addresses
are mapped into real addresses.
Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM). File

access method whereby the records in a file on a
direct access storage device can be accessed in key-
sequence (KSDS), entry-sequence (ESDS), or rela-
tive record sequence (RRDS).
VSAM. Virtual Storage Access Method.
VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access

Method.
working storage. A section of a COBOL program

used to define the data items that are used in a
program.
XPED. Transaction code entered to invoke Xpe-

diter/CICS. It provides a source-based focus for
debugging CICS application programs.
XPND. Transaction code entered to end an Xpe-

diter/CICS debugging session.
XPRT. Transaction code entered to invoke Xpe-

diter/CICS. XPRT provides a break/abend focus for
debugging CICS application programs.
XPSP. Transaction code entered to invoke the

XPSP level of Xpediter/CICS. This level is to be
used only by experienced system programmers
authorized to update CICS tables and control
areas. System-wide storage protection is set by the
XPSP user. This is the only Xpediter/CICS level
that does not restrict updating.
I-1
Index B
breakpoints
A overview, 2-1
setting, 2-1
setting breakpoints
Abend-AID for CICS interface, 9-19-8 calling programs, 5-1
accessing Abend-AID for CICS through Xpedit- COBOL programs, 3-6
er/CICS, 9-1 testing without breakpoints
issuing an Abend-AID for CICS snap dump, 9-3 COBOL programs, 3-1
turning on Abend-AID for CICS, 9-1 sourceless debugging, 4-9
viewing Abend-AID for CICS diagnostics, 9-6 breakpoints in dynamically called subroutines
viewing the Abend-AID for CICS report directory, dynamically called subroutines, breakpoints in, 5-7
9-5 browsing messages on an MQ queue, 15-3
accessed storage areas, reviewing on Select Address browsing records in a file, 12-1
screen, 16-7
accessing Abend-AID for CICS through Xpedit-
er/CICS, 9-1 C
accessing CICS storage, 16-116-8
accessing storage areas, 16-1
chaining through storage areas, 16-3 calling program, returning to, 5-6
displaying CICS DSECTs, 16-2 calling program, setting breakpoints in, 5-1
displaying CICS table entries, 16-5 chaining through CICS storage areas, 16-3
reviewing accessed areas, Select Address screen, changing PF key settings, 11-2
16-7 changing profile defaults, 11-1
accessing CICS storage areas, 16-1 CICS region storage protection, setting, 17-1
accessing DL/1 databases, 13-113-7 CICS storage access
list PCB, 13-2 See accessing CICS storage
retrieving a segment, 13-4 CICS table editing
selecting PSBs and PCBs, 13-1 See editing CICS tables and control blocks
selecting segments from the PCB, 13-2 CICS table entries, displaying, 16-5
accessing files, 12-112-7 COBOL program testing, 3-13-31
browsing records in a file, 12-1 executing the program, 3-7
changing file service requests, 12-5 resuming statement execution, 3-10
accessing list of MQ queues, 15-1 reviewing program execution, 3-10
accessing Xpediter/CICS, 2-2 setting program breakpoints, 3-6
basic access from CICS, 2-3 stepping through statements, 3-10
direct access by screen ID, 2-4 testing without breakpoints, 3-1
ending a session, 2-5 viewing source, 3-4
fast-path access to Source Listing screen (2.L), 2-4 commands, 1-9
Acrobat PDF online documentation, ix line commands, 1-11
adding messages on an MQ queue, 15-3 primary commands, 1-9
allowing storage violations, 8-2 Compuware FrontLine customer support website, ix
alternate PF key settings, 11-3 Compuware language processor, 2-1
alternate profile loading, 11-5 compile recommendations, 2-1
analyzing program data, 6-3 JCL, 2-1
analyzing program execution, 6-16-4 overview, 2-1
analyzing the data, 6-3 postprocessor, 2-1
executing the program, 6-2 preprocessor, 2-1
setting up the analysis, 6-1 control block editing
architecture of Xpediter/CICS, 1-2 See editing CICS tables and control blocks
asynchronous transactions, trapping COUNT command for execution analysis, 6-1
See monitoring tasks started from remote terminals CSECT debugging, 5-15-11
ATA, 10-1 executing a program containing multiple CSECTs,
ATASCREEN, 10-1 5-4
automatic selection of CSECTs returning to the calling program, 5-6
CSECTs, automatic selection, 5-8 setting breakpoints in a calling program, 5-1
Automatic Trap Activation, 10-1 using CSECT Selections screen, 5-9
using profiles to select CSECTs, 5-10
CSECTs, selecting, 5-9
I-2 Xpediter/CICS COBOL User Guide
D enhanced traps, 3-14

error messages
No Source Available, 2-2
DB2 database support exceptions to storage protection, defining, 17-5
See using Xpediter/CICS with DB2 execution analysis of a program
DDIO file See analyzing program execution
See Compuware language processor exiting Xpediter/CICS, 2-5
debugging a COBOL program, 3-13-31
executing the program, 3-7
resuming statement execution, 3-10 F
reviewing program execution, 3-10
setting program breakpoints, 3-6
stepping through statements, 3-10 file control table (FCT), displaying, 16-5
testing without breakpoints, 3-1 file service requests, changing, 12-5
viewing source, 3-4 file utility
debugging applications without source code, 4-14-14 See accessing files
debugging without breakpoints, 4-9 files, accessing, 12-112-7
modifying storage, 4-11 browsing records in a file, 12-1
preparing for sourceless debugging, 4-2 changing file service requests, 12-5
when to use sourceless debugging, 4-1 FrontLine, ix
debugging DB2 programs, 14-11
accessing DB2 storage, 14-13
interpreting DSNC abends and SQL codes, 14-12 G
setting breakpoints in SQL code, 14-11
setting keeps on DB2-specific data, 14-12
debugging MQ programs getting started, 2-12-6
setting breakpoints at MQ calls, 15-4 accessing Xpediter/CICS, 2-2
setting keeps on MQ-specific data, 15-4 ending a debugging session, 2-5
debugging MRO and ISC transactions, 7-1 exiting Xpediter/CICS, 2-5
debugging subroutines (CSECTs), 5-15-11 navigating through Xpediter/CICS, 2-4
executing a program containing multiple CSECTs, NEWCOPY function, 2-2
5-4 preparing a program for execution, 2-1
returning to the calling program, 5-6 global storage protection, 17-117-9
setting breakpoints in a calling program, 5-1 allowing storage violations, 17-3
using CSECT Selections screen, 5-9 defining storage exceptions, 17-5
using profiles to select CSECTs, 5-10 defining system labels, 17-3
deferring remote trap, 7-4 monitoring storage violations, 17-6
defining storage exceptions, 17-5 setting region-wide storage protection, 17-1
defining system labels for storage protection, 17-3 setting storage protection during PLT startup, 17-9
Diagnosis Mode, 1-11-2, 2-3 using for test regions, 17-3
Diagnosis/Utilities Mode, 1-11-2, 2-3 GO command to step through statements, 3-10
diagnostics, Abend-AID for CICS, 9-6
displaying CICS DSECTs, 16-2
displaying CICS table entries, 16-5 H
distributed program link, 7-1
distributed transaction processing, 7-1
DL/1 databases, accessing, 13-1 HELP AUTOKEEPS, 3-5
DSA chains, 16-4 Help facility overview, 1-6
DSECT mapping, DB2 storage, 14-13 Help facility, MQ completion and reason codes, 15-4
DSECTs, CICS, updating, 18-2 HELP INTELLIKEEPS, 3-5
DSECTs, displaying, 16-2 HTML documentation, ix
DSNC abends, 14-12 Hypertext Help
See Help facility overview
E I
easy query for DB2 database access, 14-1
accessing Table/View List screen, 14-2 IBM MQ for z/OS, 3-14, 3-22, 3-273-28, 15-1, 15-4
building an SQL easy query, 14-6 initial COMMAREA (ICA), 3-14
editing a column, 14-9 Intelligent Autokeeps, 3-5
editing a row, 14-4 intellikeep, 3-5
editing CICS tables and control blocks, 18-1 intended audience, viii
displaying and updating DSECTs, 18-2 interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS, 9-19-8
editing a CICS table entry, 18-1 accessing Abend-AID for CICS through Xpedit-
ending a debugging session, 2-5 er/CICS, 9-1
enhanced breakpoints, 3-26 issuing an Abend-AID for CICS snap dump, 9-3
turning on Abend-AID for CICS, 9-1
I-3
viewing Abend-AID for CICS diagnostics, 9-6

viewing the Abend-AID for CICS report directory,
P
9-5
introduction, vii PCB selection, 13-1
intended audience, viii PDF documentation, ix
related publications, viii PEEK primary command, 3-3
issuing an Abend-AID for CICS snap dump, 9-3 PF key settings, changing, 11-2
PF key settings, default, 1-12
PF01 (HELP), 1-13
L PF02 (RUNTO CSR), 1-13
PF03 (END), 1-13
PF04 (=X), 1-13
Language Environment modules, 5-2 PF05 (RFIND), 1-13
Language Environment user condition handlers, 5-8 PF06 (LOCATE *), 1-13
line commands, common, 1-11 PF07 (UP), 1-13
A (After), 1-11 PF08 (DOWN), 1-13
AC (After Conditional), 1-11 PF09 (GO 1), 1-13
B (Before), 1-11 PF10 (LEFT), 1-13
BC (Before Conditional), 1-12 PF11 (RIGHT), 1-13
C/CC (Count), 1-12 PF12 (GO), 1-13
D/DD (Delete), 1-12 PF13 (MENU), 1-13
DH (Delete Hex), 1-12 PF14 (MEMORY, or =2.2), 1-13
GT (Go To), 1-12 PF15 (SELECT), 1-13
H (Hex), 1-12 PF16 (WS, DS, VS or =2.3), 1-13
K/KK (Keep), 1-12 PF17 (=2.4), 1-13
P (Peek), 1-12 PF18 (=2.8), 1-13
S/SS (Skip), 1-12 PF19 (UP MAX), 1-13
SC (Skip Conditional), 1-12 PF20 (DOWN MAX), 1-13
X/XX (Exclude), 1-12 PF21 (FILE, or =5), 1-13
Z (Runto), 1-12 PF22 (DLEFT), 1-13
list PSB selection, 13-1 PF23 (DRIGHT), 1-13
loading a profile, 11-5 PF24 (RETRIEVE), 1-13
PLT startup, setting storage protection, 17-9
primary commands, common, 1-9
M AFTER, 1-9
BEFORE, 1-9
CALC, 1-9
modes of operation, 2-3 COUNT, 1-10
monitoring storage violations, 17-6 DELETE, 1-10
monitoring tasks started from remote terminals, 7-1 EXCLUDE, 1-10
7-7 EXIT, 1-10
deferring remote trap, 7-4 FIND, 1-10
releasing trapped transactions, 7-5 GO, 1-10
setting remote traps, 7-1 GOTO, 1-10
viewing a remote session, 7-2 GPREGS, 1-10
viewing traps for asynchronous transactions, 7-6 HELP, 1-10
MQ completion and reason codes, 15-4 KEEP, 1-10
MQ File Utility, 15-1 LOCATE, 1-10
MRO and ISC transactions, 7-1 REPEAT, 1-10
multiple CSECTs, working with, 5-4 RUNTO, 1-10
SET, 1-11
SHOW, 1-11
N SKIP, 1-11
USING, 1-11
VERIFY, 1-11
navigating through Xpediter/CICS, 2-4 WHEN, 1-11
NEWCOPY function, 2-2 Primary Menu, 1-4
No Source Available (error message), 2-2 Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT), 1-4, 3-1, 4-9, 9-2
Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT) using 3270 Web Bridge,
19-2
O Primary Menu (XPSP), 1-4
product architecture, 1-2
product overview, 1-11-14
offset addresses, Memory Display screen (2.2), 16-3 Help facility, 1-6
optimize compile option, 3-30 product conventions, 1-7
overview command entry, 1-9
product architecture, 1-2 common screen fields, 1-7
PF key settings, 1-12 sourceless debugging, 4-1

product facilities debugging without breakpoints, 4-9
CICS region maintenance, 1-6 modifying storage, 4-11
CICS storage protection, 1-6 preparing for, 4-2
customizing facilities, 1-6 when to use, 4-1
file utility, 1-6 SQL code, breakpoints, 14-11
source-level testing and debugging, 1-5 SQL codes, Help facility for, 14-12
profile setup, 11-1 starting Xpediter/CICS
changing PF key settings, 11-2 See getting started
changing profile defaults, 11-1 stepping through statements, 3-10
loading a profile, 11-5 stepping through subroutines and user condition han-
saving profile defaults, 11-6 dlers
program execution, analyzing subroutines, stepping through
See analyzing program execution user condition handlers, stepping through, 5-7
protection, storage, 8-1, 17-1 storage access, 16-116-8
providing storage protection, 8-1 accessing storage areas, 16-1
allowing storage violations, 8-2 chaining through storage areas, 16-3
setting automatic storage protection, 8-1 displaying CICS DSECTs, 16-2
PSB selection, 13-1 displaying CICS table entries, 16-5
reviewing accessed areas, Select Address screen,
16-7
R storage areas, reviewing on Select Address screen, 16-7
storage exceptions, defining, 17-5
storage protection, 8-1
region storage protection, setting, 17-1 allowing storage violations, 8-2, 17-3
related publications, viii defining storage exceptions, 17-5
releasing trapped transactions, 7-5 defining system labels, 17-3
remote session viewing, 7-2 monitoring storage violations, 17-6
remote task monitoring setting automatic protection, 17-2
See monitoring tasks started from remote terminals setting automatic storage protection, 8-1, 17-2
resources, accessing, 12-112-7 setting protection during PLT startup, 17-9
browsing records in a file, 12-1 setting region-wide protection, 17-1
changing file service requests, 12-5 using for test regions, 17-3
restricted modes, 1-1, 2-3 storage violations, allowing, 17-3
restricted operating modes, 1-2 subroutine (CSECT) testing
retrieving a DL/1 segment, 13-4 See debugging subroutines (CSECTs)
returning to the calling program, 5-6 System Facilities Menu (9), 1-5
reviewing accessed storage, Select Address screen, 16-7 system labels, defining for storage protection, 17-3
S T
screen format, 1-7 table entries, CICS, displaying, 16-5
screen navigation, 2-4 tables, CICS, editing
Select Address screen, reviewing accessed storage ar- See editing CICS tables and control blocks
eas, 16-7 Task Storage screen (2.S), 16-4
selecting CSECTs, 5-9 test region storage protection, 17-3
selecting PSBs and PCBs, 13-1 testing a COBOL program, 3-13-31
setting breakpoints in a calling program, 5-1 executing the program, 3-7
setting storage protection, 8-1 resuming statement execution, 3-10
automatic protection using XPSP, 17-2 reviewing program execution, 3-10
automatic storage protection using XPED, 8-1 setting program breakpoints, 3-6
defining storage exceptions, 17-5 stepping through statements, 3-10
defining system labels, 17-3 testing without breakpoints, 3-1
during PLT startup, 17-9 viewing source, 3-4
region-wide storage protection, 17-1 testing a DB2 program
test region protection, 17-3 See debugging DB2 programs
setting up a profile, 11-1 testing applications without source code, 4-14-14
changing PF key settings, 11-2 debugging without breakpoints, 4-9
changing profile defaults, 11-1 modifying storage, 4-11
loading a profile, 11-5 preparing for sourceless debugging, 4-2
saving profile defaults, 11-6 when to use sourceless debugging, 4-1
setting up program analysis, 6-1 testing subroutines (CSECTs), 5-15-11
shared directory, G-5 executing a program containing multiple CSECTs,
SLS overview, 2-1 5-4
snap dump, Abend-AID for CICS, 9-3 returning to the calling program, 5-6
source-level support (SLS) debugging overview, 2-1 setting breakpoints in a calling program, 5-1
I-5
using CSECT Selections screen, 5-9

using profiles to select CSECTs, 5-10
transferring between Xpediter/CICS screens, 2-4
trapping remote tasks
See monitoring tasks started from remote terminals
U
update password security, 1-13
using Automatic Trap Activation, 10-110-2
using global storage protection, 17-117-9
allowing storage violations, 17-3
defining storage exceptions, 17-5
defining system labels, 17-3
monitoring storage violations, 17-6
setting automatic storage protection, 17-2
setting region-wide storage protection, 17-1
setting storage protection during PLT startup, 17-9
using for test regions, 17-3
using Xpediter/CICS with DB2, 14-1
debugging DB2 programs, 14-11
accessing DB2 storage, 14-13
interpreting DSNC abends and SQL codes, 14-12
setting breakpoints in SQL code, 14-11
setting keeps on DB2-specific data, 14-12
using the DB2 easy query, 14-1
accessing Table/View List screen, 14-2
building an SQL easy query, 14-6
editing a column, 14-9
editing a row, 14-4
setting session default attributes, 14-1
Utilities Mode, 1-11-2, 2-3
V
viewing the Abend-AID for CICS diagnostics, 9-6
viewing the Abend-AID for CICS report directory, 9-5
W
Web Bridge support, 19-1
WebSphere MQ, 3-14, 3-24
WebSphere MQ. See IBM MQ for z/OS
X
XPED transaction, 1-3
XPED transaction users, viii
Xpediter Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT), 1-4, 4-9, 9-2
Xpediter Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT) using 3270 Web
Bridge, 19-2
Xpediter Primary Menu (XPSP), 1-4
XPRT transaction, 1-3
XPRT transaction users, viii
XPSP transaction overview, 1-4
XPSP transaction users, viii

XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XPCICSCOBOLUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xpediter/CICS

COBOL User Guide

Please direct questions about Xpediter/CICS

Xpediter/CICS Customer Support

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS-Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to

Chapter 1. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Testing a COBOL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Stepping and Reviewing Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Chapter 4. Debugging Applications Without Source Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Debugging Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. Analyzing Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7. Monitoring Tasks Started from Remote Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Providing Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9. Interfacing with Abend-AID for CICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10. Using Automatic Trap Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Chapter 11. Setting Up a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Chapter 12. Accessing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Chapter 13. Accessing DL/1 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Chapter 14. Using Xpediter/CICS with DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Chapter 15. Using Xpediter/CICS with MQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Chapter 16. Accessing CICS Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Chapter 17. Using Global Storage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Sample Storage Protection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Chapter 18. Editing CICS Tables and Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Chapter 19. Using 3270 Web Bridge Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

This guide provides step-by-step instructions on how to use Xpediter/CICS to solve

This guide contains the following chapters:

Chapter 3, Testing a COBOL Program: Shows how to test an application transaction

Chapter 4, Debugging Applications Without Source Code: Provides tips on

Chapter 5, Debugging Subroutines: Provides tips on setting breakpoints in the calling

Chapter 6, Analyzing Program Execution: Describes how to set up program analysis.

Chapter 8, Providing Storage Protection: Shows how to handle storage violations

Chapter 11, Setting Up a Profile: Describes how to set up a customized environment

Glossary: Describes Xpediter/CICS features, and defines key terms.

Xpediter/CICS Release Notes: Overview of release features, supported operating

Release Notes in HTML format

The product documentation is available for viewing or downloading:

Compuware FrontLine Customer Support Website

Compuware FrontLine provides access to critical information about your Compuware

Contacting Customer Support

Note: Please report all high-priority issues by telephone.

The Compuware site provides a variety of product and support information.

Information for Customer Support

1. Identify the release number of Compuware product(s) in use.

View and interact with program source code, online.

Note: XPLINK programs are excluded from Xpediter/CICS storage protection.

Three restricted modes of operation Diagnosis Mode, Utilities Mode, and

Xpediter/CICS supports applications written in Assembler, COBOL, C, or PL/I, plus a

Display-only access to CICS storage areas

XPED and XPRT Transactions

PF6 LOCATE * (2.L or 2.20)

Figure 1-1. Primary Menu (XPED/XPRT)

-------------------- XPEDITER/CICS 17.02.00 - PRIMARY MENU ----------------C123

Figure 1-2. Copyright/Trade Secret Notice Screen

------------------------ XPEDITER/CICS - HELP FACILITY --------------------C123

9 SYSTEM FACILITIES - Access global region analysis facilities

A CICS storage and table editor

Power to activate storage protection anywhere in the CICS region

* COMPUWARE CORPORATION * C123

* BEFORE SET **